FF220001

Owner’s Manual

BL00005204-200 EN
 Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of this product. Be sure that
you have read this manual and understood its contents be-
fore using the camera. Keep the manual where it will be
read by all who use the product.

For the Latest Information

The latest versions of the manuals are available from:

https://fujifilm-dsc.com/en/manual/

The website can be accessed not only from

your computer but also from smartphones
and tablets. It also contains information on
the software license.
For information on firmware updates, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/

ii
P Chapter Index
Menu List iv

1 Before You Begin 1

2 First Steps 33

3 Basic Photography and Playback 51

4 Movie Recording and Playback 61

5 Taking Photographs 71

6 The Shooting Menus 117

7 Playback and the Playback Menu 219

8 Network/USB Features and Settings 247

9 The Setup Menus 271

10 Shortcuts 311

11 Peripherals and Optional Accessories 333

12 Technical Notes 355

iii
 Menu List
Camera menu options are listed below.

Shooting Menus
Adjust settings when shooting photos or movies.
Menu List

N See page 117 for details.

Photo Menus
N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still
photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in
either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.

H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING P H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING P

IMAGE SIZE 118 HIGH ISO NR 132
IMAGE QUALITY 119 CLARITY 132
RAW RECORDING 120 LONG EXPOSURE NR 132
SELECT JPEG/HEIF 121 LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER 133
1⁄4 3⁄4
FILM SIMULATION 122 COLOR SPACE 133
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR 124 PIXEL MAPPING 133
GRAIN EFFECT 124 x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING 134
COLOR CHROME EFFECT 125 x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 134
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE 125 AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING 139
4⁄4
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT 125 xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 140
WHITE BALANCE 126
DYNAMIC RANGE 130
2⁄4
D RANGE PRIORITY 130
TONE CURVE 131
COLOR 131
SHARPNESS 131

iv
 Menu List

G AF/MF SETTING P A SHOOTING SETTING P

FOCUS AREA 143 DRIVE SETTING 162
AF MODE 143 SPORTS FINDER MODE 167
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS 144 PRE-SHOT sJ 168
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION 148 SELF-TIMER 168
1⁄3 1⁄3
AF POINT DISPLAYyz 148 SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING 169

Menu List
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT 148 SELF-TIMER LAMP 169
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS 149 PHOTOMETRY 169
PRE-AF 149 SHUTTER TYPE 170
xF AF ILLUMINATOR 150 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING 171
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING 151 INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING 172
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING 153 EXPOSURE SMOOTHING
AF+MF 155 INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE 173
2⁄3
MF ASSIST 156 2⁄3 FLICKER REDUCTION 173
FOCUS CHECK 156 FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING 174
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA 157 IS MODE 174
xF INSTANT AF SETTING 157 ISO AUTO SETTING 175
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE 157 DIGITAL TELE-CONV. 175
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY 158 MULTI EXPOSURE 176
3⁄3
xF AF RANGE LIMITER 159 3⁄3 PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT 177
TOUCH SCREEN MODE 160 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 179
F FLASH SETTING P
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING 180
RED EYE REMOVAL 180
TTL-LOCK MODE 181
LED LIGHT SETTING 181
COMMANDER SETTING 182
CH SETTING 182
B MOVIE SETTING P
MOVIE MODE 183
HIGH SPEED REC 183
MEDIA REC SETTING 183
F IS MODE 184
F IS MODE BOOST 184
AUDIO SETTING 184
F REC FRAME INDICATOR 186

v
 Movie Menus
N Items marked with both x and F icons are available in both the still
photography and movie shooting menus. Changes to these items in
either menu also apply to the item in the remaining menu.

B MOVIE SETTING P H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING P

Menu List

MOVIE SETTING LIST 187 F FILM SIMULATION 201

MOVIE MODE 188 F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR 201
HIGH SPEED REC 189 F WHITE BALANCE 202
F SELF-TIMER 190 F DYNAMIC RANGE 202
1⁄3 1⁄2
MEDIA REC SETTING 190 F TONE CURVE 202
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING 192 F COLOR 202
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION 193 F SHARPNESS 203
F-Log/HLG RECORDING 194 F HIGH ISO NR 203
DATA LEVEL SETTING 195 INTERFRAME NR 203
F PHOTOMETRY 195 2⁄2 F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION 204
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING 195 xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING 204
F IS MODE 196
2⁄3
F IS MODE BOOST 196
ZEBRA SETTING 197
ZEBRA LEVEL 197
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL 198
F REC FRAME INDICATOR 198
TALLY LIGHT 199
F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING 200
3⁄3
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING 200
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING 200
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 200

vi
 Menu List

G AF/MF SETTING P P AUDIO SETTING P

F FOCUS AREA 205 INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 213
F AF MODE 205 EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT 213
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING 206 MIC JACK SETTING 214
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT 206 MIC LEVEL LIMITER 214
WIND FILTER 214
1⁄2 xF AF ILLUMINATOR 207

Menu List
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION LOW CUT FILTER 214
207
SETTING HEADPHONES VOLUME 214
F SUBJECT DETECTION 207 XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING 215
SETTING
Q TIME CODE SETTING P
F AF+MF 207
TIME CODE DISPLAY 216
F MF ASSIST 208
START TIME SETTING 216
F FOCUS CHECK 208
COUNT UP SETTING 217
xF INSTANT AF SETTING 208
DROP FRAME 217
2⁄2 xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE 209 HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT 218
xF AF RANGE LIMITER 209
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE 210
FOCUS CHECK LOCK 212

vii
 The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
N See page 225 for details.
C PLAY BACK MENU P C PLAY BACK MENU P
Menu List

SWITCH SLOT 225 IMAGE ROTATE 235

RAW CONVERSION 226 VOICE MEMO SETTING 236
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION 229 RATING 237
ERASE 230 COPY 238
1⁄3 2⁄3
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE 232 TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE 239
CROP 232 xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION 241
RESIZE 233 SLIDE SHOW 241
PROTECT 234 PHOTOBOOK ASSIST 242
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) 244
3⁄3 instax PRINTER PRINT 245
DISP ASPECT 246

viii
 Menu List

Setup Menus
Adjust basic camera settings.
N See page 271 for details.
D USER SETTING P D SCREEN SETTING P

Menu List
FORMAT 272 VIEW MODE SETTING 282
b AREA SETTING 273 EVF BRIGHTNESS 282
DATE/TIME 273 EVF COLOR 282
TIME DIFFERENCE 274 EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT 283
1⁄2 1⁄4
Qa 275 LCD BRIGHTNESS 284
x MY MENU SETTING 275 LCD COLOR 284
F MY MENU SETTING 275 LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT 284
SENSOR CLEANING 276 IMAGE DISP. 285
BATTERY AGE 276 AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS 285
2⁄2 RESET 277 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE 286
REGULATORY 277 NATURAL LIVE VIEW 286
F-Log VIEW ASSIST 287
D SOUND SETTING P 2⁄4
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING 287
AF BEEP VOL. 278
FRAMING GUIDELINE 288
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. 278
AUTOROTATE PB 289
OPERATION VOL. 279
FOCUS SCALE UNITS 289
F REC START/STOP VOLUME 279
APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS 289
1⁄2 tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER 279 DUAL DISPLAY SETTING 290
VOLUME
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING 290
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER 280
SOUND LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) 291
3⁄4
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME 280 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) 291
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND 280 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING 292
PLAYBACK VOLUME 281 INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ. 292
2⁄2 LOCATION INFO 293
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK 281
x Q MENU BACKGROUND 293
4⁄4
F Q MENU BACKGROUND 293

ix
 Menu List

D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING P D POWER MANAGEMENT P

FOCUS LEVER SETTING 294 AUTO POWER OFF 306
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU 295 PERFORMANCE 306
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU 295 EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING 307
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING 295 AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. 307
1⁄3 POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION P
295 D SAVE DATA SETTING
Menu List

(Fn) SETTING
FRAME NO. 308
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING 295
EDIT FILE NAME 309
COMMAND DIAL SETTING 296
x CARD SLOT SETTING 309
o S.S OPERATION 297
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) 309
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION 297
SELECT FOLDER 310
SHUTTER AF 298
COPYRIGHT INFO 310
SHUTTER AE 298
GEOTAGGING 310
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS 299
2⁄3
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD 299
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING 300
AE/AF-LOCK MODE 302
AWB-LOCK MODE 302
APERTURE RING SETTING (A) 303
APERTURE SETTING 303
3⁄3 a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING 303
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING 304
LOCK 305

x
 Menu List

The Network/USB Settings Menu

Adjust settings for network and USB connections.
N See page 264 for details.
I NETWORK/USB SETTING P

Menu List
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING 264
AIRPLANE MODE 267
NETWORK SETTING 267
instax PRINTER CONNECTION 267
SETTING
CONNECTION MODE 268
USB POWER SUPPLY/ 270
COMM SETTING
INFORMATION 270
RESET WIRELESS SETTING 270

xi
P Table of Contents
Introduction ..........................................................................................................ii
For the Latest Information .......................................................................................... ii
Menu List...............................................................................................................iv
Shooting Menus ..............................................................................................................iv
The Playback Menu......................................................................................................viii
Setup Menus ...................................................................................................................... ix
The Network/USB Settings Menu ......................................................................... xi
Supplied Accessories .................................................................................... xxv
About This Manual........................................................................................xxvi
Symbols and Conventions ...................................................................................xxvi
Terminology ..................................................................................................................xxvi

1 Before You Begin 1

Parts of the Camera ............................................................................................2
The Serial Number Plate ..............................................................................................4
The Focus Stick (Focus Lever) ...................................................................................4
The Selector.........................................................................................................................4
The Shutter Speed and Sensitivity Dials ............................................................5
STILL/MOVIE mode dial....................................................................................................5
The Exposure Compensation Dial .........................................................................6
The Drive Dial .....................................................................................................................6
The Command Dials.......................................................................................................7
The Indicator Lamp.........................................................................................................9
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 10
The Eye Cup...................................................................................................................... 11
Focusing the Viewfinder ........................................................................................... 11
Camera Displays ............................................................................................... 12
The Electronic Viewfinder ........................................................................................ 12
The LCD Monitor ........................................................................................................... 14
Choosing a Display Mode........................................................................................ 16
Adjusting Display Brightness ................................................................................. 18
Display Rotation ............................................................................................................. 18
The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................... 19
The Dual Display ............................................................................................................ 20

xii
 Table of Contents

Customizing the Standard Display..................................................................... 21

Virtual Horizon ................................................................................................................ 23
Using the Menus .............................................................................................. 24
The Menus......................................................................................................................... 24
Selecting a Menu Tab ................................................................................................. 25
Touch Screen Mode......................................................................................... 26
Shooting Touch Controls ......................................................................................... 26
Playback Touch Controls........................................................................................... 31

2 First Steps 33
Attaching the Strap ......................................................................................... 34
Attaching a Lens ............................................................................................... 35
Inserting the Battery ....................................................................................... 36
Inserting Memory Cards ................................................................................ 38
Using Two Cards ............................................................................................................ 40
Compatible Memory Cards .................................................................................... 41
Charging the Battery ...................................................................................... 42
Turning the Camera On and Off ................................................................. 46
Checking the Battery Level........................................................................... 47
Basic Setup ......................................................................................................... 48
Choosing a Different Language........................................................................... 50
Changing the Time and Date ................................................................................ 50

3 Basic Photography and Playback 51

Taking Photographs (Mode P) ..................................................................... 52
Viewing Pictures ............................................................................................... 56
HDMI Output ................................................................................................................... 57
Deleting Pictures .............................................................................................. 59

4 Movie Recording and Playback 61

Recording Movies ............................................................................................ 62
Recording Movies ......................................................................................................... 62
Adjusting Movie Settings ......................................................................................... 68
Viewing Movies................................................................................................. 69

xiii
 5 Taking Photographs 71
P, S, A, and M Modes........................................................................................ 72
Mode P: Program AE ................................................................................................... 72
Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE..................................................................................... 74
Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE ................................................................................ 78
Mode M: Manual Exposure ..................................................................................... 80
Autofocus ............................................................................................................ 82
Focus Mode ...................................................................................................................... 83
Autofocus Options (AF Mode) .............................................................................. 85
Focus-Point Selection................................................................................................. 87
Manual Focus..................................................................................................... 91
Checking Focus .............................................................................................................. 93
Sensitivity............................................................................................................ 96
AUTO ..................................................................................................................................... 97
Metering .............................................................................................................. 98
Exposure Compensation ............................................................................... 99
C (Custom)...................................................................................................................... 100
Focus/Exposure Lock ....................................................................................101
Other Controls ............................................................................................................. 102
Bracketing .........................................................................................................103
O AE BKT ........................................................................................................................ 103
W ISO BKT ..................................................................................................................... 103
X FILM SIMULATION BKT.................................................................................... 104
V WHITE BALANCE BKT ....................................................................................... 104
Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT ..................................................................................... 104
Z FOCUS BKT............................................................................................................. 104
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode).........................................................105
HDR .....................................................................................................................107
Advanced Filters .............................................................................................109
Advanced Filter Options ........................................................................................ 110
Panoramas ........................................................................................................111
Multiple Exposures ........................................................................................114

xiv
 Table of Contents

6 The Shooting Menus 117

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography) .....................................118
IMAGE SIZE ..................................................................................................................... 118
IMAGE QUALITY .......................................................................................................... 119
RAW RECORDING ....................................................................................................... 120
SELECT JPEG/HEIF...................................................................................................... 121
FILM SIMULATION ...................................................................................................... 122
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR.................................................................................. 124
GRAIN EFFECT .............................................................................................................. 124
COLOR CHROME EFFECT....................................................................................... 125
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE ..................................................................................... 125
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT ............................................................................................ 125
WHITE BALANCE ......................................................................................................... 126
DYNAMIC RANGE ....................................................................................................... 130
D RANGE PRIORITY .................................................................................................... 130
TONE CURVE.................................................................................................................. 131
COLOR ............................................................................................................................... 131
SHARPNESS .................................................................................................................... 131
HIGH ISO NR .................................................................................................................. 132
CLARITY ............................................................................................................................ 132
LONG EXPOSURE NR ................................................................................................ 132
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER ....................................................................... 133
COLOR SPACE ............................................................................................................... 133
PIXEL MAPPING ........................................................................................................... 133
x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................................ 134
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING ..................................................................... 134
AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING.................................................................... 139
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 140
AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................143
FOCUS AREA ................................................................................................................. 143
AF MODE ......................................................................................................................... 143
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS ....................................................................................... 144
STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION .................................................................. 148
AF POINT DISPLAY yz ...................................................................................... 148
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT .................................................................................. 148
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS................................................................................ 149

xv
 PRE-AF ............................................................................................................................... 149
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 150
g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING ................................................................. 151
SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING .......................................................................... 153
AF+MF .............................................................................................................................. 155
MF ASSIST ....................................................................................................................... 156
FOCUS CHECK .............................................................................................................. 156
INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA.............................................................. 157
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 157
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 157
RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY ................................................................................... 158
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 159
TOUCH SCREEN MODE ........................................................................................... 160
SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)................................................162
DRIVE SETTING ............................................................................................................. 162
SPORTS FINDER MODE ........................................................................................... 167
PRE-SHOT sJ .......................................................................................................... 168
SELF-TIMER ..................................................................................................................... 168
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING.................................................................................... 169
SELF-TIMER LAMP....................................................................................................... 169
PHOTOMETRY ............................................................................................................... 169
SHUTTER TYPE.............................................................................................................. 170
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING ................................................................................ 171
INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING........................ 172
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE ................................................................................... 173
FLICKER REDUCTION ................................................................................................ 173
FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING ..................................................................................... 174
IS MODE ........................................................................................................................... 174
ISO AUTO SETTING .................................................................................................... 175
DIGITAL TELE-CONV. ................................................................................................. 175
MULTI EXPOSURE ....................................................................................................... 176
PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT ....................................................................................... 177
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 179
FLASH SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................180
FLASH FUNCTION SETTING ................................................................................. 180
RED EYE REMOVAL..................................................................................................... 180

xvi
 Table of Contents

TTL-LOCK MODE ......................................................................................................... 181

LED LIGHT SETTING .................................................................................................. 181
COMMANDER SETTING .......................................................................................... 182
CH SETTING ................................................................................................................... 182
MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography) ........................................................183
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 183
HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 183
MEDIA REC SETTING................................................................................................. 183
F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 184
F IS MODE BOOST................................................................................................... 184
AUDIO SETTING........................................................................................................... 184
F REC FRAME INDICATOR ................................................................................... 186
MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................187
MOVIE SETTING LIST................................................................................................. 187
MOVIE MODE ................................................................................................................ 188
HIGH SPEED REC ......................................................................................................... 189
F SELF-TIMER .............................................................................................................. 190
MEDIA REC SETTING................................................................................................. 190
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING......................................................................................... 192
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION .................................................................. 193
F-Log/HLG RECORDING ......................................................................................... 194
DATA LEVEL SETTING ............................................................................................... 195
F PHOTOMETRY ....................................................................................................... 195
F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING.............................................................................. 195
F IS MODE .................................................................................................................... 196
F IS MODE BOOST................................................................................................... 196
ZEBRA SETTING ........................................................................................................... 197
ZEBRA LEVEL ................................................................................................................. 197
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL ................................................................ 198
F REC FRAME INDICATOR ................................................................................... 198
TALLY LIGHT ................................................................................................................... 199
F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING............................................................................. 200
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING...................................................................... 200
F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING ............................................................ 200
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 200

xvii
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording) ......................................201
F FILM SIMULATION............................................................................................... 201
F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR .......................................................................... 201
F WHITE BALANCE .................................................................................................. 202
F DYNAMIC RANGE ................................................................................................ 202
F TONE CURVE .......................................................................................................... 202
F COLOR........................................................................................................................ 202
F SHARPNESS............................................................................................................. 203
F HIGH ISO NR ........................................................................................................... 203
INTERFRAME NR .......................................................................................................... 203
F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION ............................................................. 204
xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING .................................................................. 204
AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording) .........................................................205
F FOCUS AREA .......................................................................................................... 205
F AF MODE .................................................................................................................. 205
F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING .................................................................................. 206
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT .................................................................................. 206
xF AF ILLUMINATOR .......................................................................................... 207
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING .......................................................... 207
F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING ................................................................... 207
F AF+MF ....................................................................................................................... 207
F MF ASSIST ................................................................................................................ 208
F FOCUS CHECK ....................................................................................................... 208
xF INSTANT AF SETTING ................................................................................. 208
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE........................................................................... 209
xF AF RANGE LIMITER....................................................................................... 209
F TOUCH SCREEN MODE .................................................................................... 210
FOCUS CHECK LOCK ................................................................................................ 212
AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording).........................................................213
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT............................................................... 213
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT.............................................................. 213
MIC JACK SETTING..................................................................................................... 214
MIC LEVEL LIMITER .................................................................................................... 214
WIND FILTER .................................................................................................................. 214
LOW CUT FILTER .......................................................................................................... 214
HEADPHONES VOLUME ......................................................................................... 214
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING................................................................................. 215

xviii
 Table of Contents

TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)................................................216

TIME CODE DISPLAY ................................................................................................. 216
START TIME SETTING ................................................................................................ 216
COUNT UP SETTING.................................................................................................. 217
DROP FRAME ................................................................................................................ 217
HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT ................................................................................... 218

7 Playback and the Playback Menu 219

The Playback Display ....................................................................................220
The DISP/BACK Button............................................................................................ 221
Viewing Pictures .............................................................................................223
Playback Zoom ............................................................................................................ 224
Multi-Frame Playback .............................................................................................. 224
The Playback Menu .......................................................................................225
SWITCH SLOT ................................................................................................................ 225
RAW CONVERSION .................................................................................................... 226
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION ...................................................................... 229
ERASE ................................................................................................................................. 230
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE......................................................................................... 232
CROP .................................................................................................................................. 232
RESIZE ................................................................................................................................ 233
PROTECT .......................................................................................................................... 234
IMAGE ROTATE ............................................................................................................. 235
VOICE MEMO SETTING............................................................................................ 236
RATING .............................................................................................................................. 237
COPY .................................................................................................................................. 238
TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE.............................................................. 239
xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION................................................................ 241
SLIDE SHOW .................................................................................................................. 241
PHOTOBOOK ASSIST ................................................................................................ 242
PRINT ORDER (DPOF) ............................................................................................... 244
instax PRINTER PRINT ............................................................................................... 245
DISP ASPECT.................................................................................................................. 246

8 Network/USB Features and Settings 247

Overview ...........................................................................................................248
Supported Features .................................................................................................. 248

xix
 Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)..............................................249
Installing Smartphone Apps ............................................................................... 249
Connecting to a Smartphone ............................................................................ 249
Using the Smartphone App ................................................................................ 251
Connecting to Smartphones (USB) .........................................................252
Copying Pictures to a Smartphone ................................................................ 252
Connecting the Camera and Computer ..................................................... 255
Using the Camera as a Webcam ...............................................................257
instax SHARE Printers ...................................................................................258
Establishing a Connection.................................................................................... 258
Printing Pictures .......................................................................................................... 259
Tethered Photography .................................................................................260
Tethered Photography via USB.......................................................................... 260
Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN ..................................................... 261
RAW Processing ..............................................................................................262
Saving and Loading Settings .....................................................................263
Saving and Loading Settings Using a Computer ................................... 263
Network/USB Setting Menus .....................................................................264
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING ................................................................. 264
AIRPLANE MODE ........................................................................................................ 267
NETWORK SETTING .................................................................................................. 267
instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING........................................................ 267
CONNECTION MODE ............................................................................................... 268
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING .......................................................... 270
INFORMATION .............................................................................................................. 270
RESET WIRELESS SETTING ..................................................................................... 270

9 The Setup Menus 271

USER SETTING .................................................................................................272
FORMAT............................................................................................................................ 272
b AREA SETTING..................................................................................................... 273
DATE/TIME ...................................................................................................................... 273
TIME DIFFERENCE....................................................................................................... 274
Qa ............................................................................................................... 275
x MY MENU SETTING............................................................................................ 275
F MY MENU SETTING ............................................................................................ 275

xx
 Table of Contents

SENSOR CLEANING ................................................................................................... 276

BATTERY AGE ................................................................................................................ 276
RESET ................................................................................................................................. 277
REGULATORY................................................................................................................. 277
SOUND SETTING .............................................................................................278
AF BEEP VOL. ................................................................................................................. 278
SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL. ............................................................................................. 278
OPERATION VOL. ......................................................................................................... 279
F REC START/STOP VOLUME ............................................................................. 279
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ........................................................ 279
tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND .......................................................... 280
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME ............................................................... 280
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND ................................................................. 280
PLAYBACK VOLUME .................................................................................................. 281
4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK ............................................................................................. 281
SCREEN SETTING ............................................................................................282
VIEW MODE SETTING............................................................................................... 282
EVF BRIGHTNESS ......................................................................................................... 282
EVF COLOR ..................................................................................................................... 282
EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT..................................................................................... 283
LCD BRIGHTNESS ........................................................................................................ 284
LCD COLOR .................................................................................................................... 284
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT.................................................................................... 284
IMAGE DISP. .................................................................................................................... 285
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS .......................................................................................... 285
PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE ........................................................... 286
NATURAL LIVE VIEW .................................................................................................. 286
F-Log VIEW ASSIST ..................................................................................................... 287
ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING .............................................................................. 287
FRAMING GUIDELINE ............................................................................................... 288
AUTOROTATE PB.......................................................................................................... 289
FOCUS SCALE UNITS ................................................................................................ 289
APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS................................................................ 289
DUAL DISPLAY SETTING ......................................................................................... 290
DISP. CUSTOM SETTING .......................................................................................... 290

xxi
 LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) ....................................................................... 291
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD) ...................................................................... 291
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING .................................................................. 292
INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.......................................................................... 292
LOCATION INFO........................................................................................................... 293
x Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 293
F Q MENU BACKGROUND ................................................................................. 293
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING................................................................................294
FOCUS LEVER SETTING ........................................................................................... 294
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 295
F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU ................................................................................ 295
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING........................................................................................ 295
POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING ........................................ 295
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING .............................................................................. 295
COMMAND DIAL SETTING ................................................................................... 296
o S.S OPERATION .................................................................................................... 297
COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.............................................................................. 297
SHUTTER AF................................................................................................................... 298
SHUTTER AE................................................................................................................... 298
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS .......................................................................................... 299
SHOOT WITHOUT CARD......................................................................................... 299
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING ............................................................................ 300
AE/AF-LOCK MODE ................................................................................................... 302
AWB-LOCK MODE ...................................................................................................... 302
APERTURE RING SETTING (A) .............................................................................. 303
APERTURE SETTING .................................................................................................. 303
a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING ..................................................................................... 303
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING ...................................................................................... 304
LOCK................................................................................................................................... 305
POWER MANAGEMENT ................................................................................306
AUTO POWER OFF ..................................................................................................... 306
PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................ 306
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING ..................................................................................... 307
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP. ....................................................................................... 307

xxii
 Table of Contents

SAVE DATA SETTING ......................................................................................308

FRAME NO. ..................................................................................................................... 308
EDIT FILE NAME ........................................................................................................... 309
x CARD SLOT SETTING ......................................................................................... 309
SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL) ........................................................................... 309
SELECT FOLDER........................................................................................................... 310
COPYRIGHT INFO........................................................................................................ 310
GEOTAGGING ................................................................................................................ 310

10Shortcuts 311
Shortcut Options ............................................................................................312
MY MENU ..........................................................................................................313
MY MENU SETTING ................................................................................................... 313
The Quick Menu .............................................................................................315
The Quick Menu Display........................................................................................ 315
Viewing and Changing Settings ....................................................................... 317
Editing the Quick Menu ......................................................................................... 318
Function Controls...........................................................................................321
The Function Buttons .............................................................................................. 321
Touch-Function Gestures ...................................................................................... 326
Lens Function Buttons ............................................................................................ 329

11Peripherals and Optional Accessories 333

Lenses.................................................................................................................334
Lens Parts ........................................................................................................................ 334
Lens Care ......................................................................................................................... 335
Removing Lens Caps ............................................................................................... 335
Attaching Lens Hoods ............................................................................................ 336
Lenses with Aperture Rings................................................................................. 337
Lenses with No Aperture Rings ......................................................................... 338
Lenses with O.I.S. Switches ................................................................................... 338
Manual Focus Lenses ............................................................................................... 339
Power Zoom Lenses ................................................................................................. 340

xxiii
 Table of Contents

External Flash Units .......................................................................................341

Flash Settings................................................................................................................ 342
EF-X8 .................................................................................................................................. 343
SYNC TERMINAL .......................................................................................................... 345
SHOE MOUNT FLASH............................................................................................... 346
COMMANDER(OPTICAL) ........................................................................................ 349
Handgrips .........................................................................................................353

12Technical Notes 355

Accessories from Fujifilm.............................................................................356
Software for Use with Your Camera .........................................................359
Smartphone Apps ..................................................................................................... 359
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX..................................... 359
Capture One Express for Fujifilm ...................................................................... 360
Capture One for Fujifilm ........................................................................................ 360
FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom) ...... 360
FUJIFILM X Acquire ................................................................................................... 361
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO ....................................................................................... 361
FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner ........................................................................... 361
For Your Safety ................................................................................................362
Product Care ....................................................................................................373
Cleaning the Image Sensor ........................................................................374
Firmware Updates..........................................................................................375
Checking the Firmware Version ........................................................................ 375
Troubleshooting .............................................................................................376
Warning Messages and Displays ..............................................................389
Memory Card Capacity ................................................................................394
Specifications ..................................................................................................395

xxiv
 Supplied Accessories
The following are included with the camera:
• NP-W235 rechargeable battery
O For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at shipment.
The camera will not function if the battery is not charged; be
sure to charge the battery before use (P 42).

• AC-5VJ AC power adapter

• Plug adapter
• USB cable (approx. 0.6 m/2 ft.)
• Body cap (comes attached to camera)
• Shoulder strap
• Hot shoe cover (comes attached to hot shoe)
• Sync terminal cap (comes attached to camera)
• Headphone adapter
• Basic Manual
N • If you purchased a lens kit, check that a lens is included.
• The plug adapter supplied varies with the country or region.
• The headphone adapter converts the USB Type-C connector to a
⌀3.5 mm headphone jack.
• For information on compatible computer software, see “Software for
Use with Your Camera” (P 359).

xxv
 About This Manual
This manual contains instructions for your FUJIFILM X-T5 dig-
ital camera. Be sure you have read and understood its con-
tents before proceeding.

Symbols and Conventions

The following symbols are used in this manual:
O Information that should be read to prevent damage to the
product.
N Additional information that may be helpful when using the
product.
P Pages on which related information may be found.
Menus and other text in the displays are shown in bold. Illustrations
are for explanatory purposes only; drawings may be simplified,
while photographs are not necessarily taken with the model of
camera described in this manual.

Terminology
The optional SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory cards the camera
uses to store pictures are referred to as “memory cards”. The elec-
tronic viewfinder may be referred to as the “EVF” and the LCD
monitor as the “LCD”. Smartphones and tablets are referred to as
“smartphones”.

xxvi
Before You Begin

1
 Parts of the Camera

1
Before You Begin

A Fn1 button .....................................................321 P Lens release button ........................................35

B Exposure compensation dial.................. 6, 99 Q Fn2 button .....................................................321
C Shutter button .................................................55 R AF-assist illuminator...................................150
D Shutter speed dial Self-timer lamp ............................................168
.................................................5, 72, 74, 78, 80 Tally light ........................................................199
E Dial lock release ................................................5 S STILL/MOVIE mode dial..................... 5, 62, 72
F Hot shoe .........................................................342 T Front command dial...............................7, 296
G Microphone ......................................................62 U ON/OFF switch .................................................46
H Diopter adjustment control (lockable) V Hot shoe cover ..............................................342
..........................................................................11 W Body cap............................................................35
I Sensitivity dial............................................. 5, 96 X Microphone jack (⌀3.5 mm) .......................67
J Drive dial .............................................................6 Y Remote release connector (⌀2.5 mm)
K Strap clip............................................................34 ..........................................................................77
L Connector cover Z USB connector (Type-C) ...............................42
M Sync terminal ................................................345 a HDMI Micro connector (Type D) ................57
N Focus mode selector ......................................83 b Speaker .................................................... 69, 281
O Lens signal contacts
2
 Parts of the Camera

Before You Begin

c b (delete) button ...........................................59 p Selector buttons ................................................4
d a (playback) button ...................................56 q MENU/OK button .............................................24
e Electronic viewfinder (EVF) r Battery-chamber cover latch ......................36
..................................................... 12, 16, 18, 26 s Battery-chamber cover .................................36
f Eye cup (lockable)...........................................11 t DISP (display)/BACK button ............... 19, 221
g VIEW MODE button .........................................16 x(Bluetooth) button ..................................249
h AFON button .........................................102, 321 u Tripod mount
i Rear command dial .......................7, 223, 296 v LCD monitor .......................................10, 14, 16
j Q (quick menu) button ...............................315 Touch screen .................................26, 160, 210
k Indicator lamp ..........................................9, 199 w Eye sensor..........................................................16
Tally light ........................................................199 x Memory card slot 2 ........................................38
l AEL (exposure lock) button ..............102, 321 y Memory card slot 1 ........................................38
m Focus stick (focus lever)...................4, 87, 294 z Battery chamber .............................................36
n Memory card slot cover latch......................38 0 Battery latch.....................................................37
o Memory card slot cover ................................38 1 Serial number plate..........................................4

3
 The Serial Number Plate
Do not remove the serial number plate,
which provides the CMIIT ID, serial num-
ber, and other important information.

1
Serial number plate
Before You Begin

The Focus Stick (Focus Lever)

Tilt or press the focus stick to select the fo-
cus area. The focus stick can also be used
to navigate the menus.

N To choose the role played by the focus stick, press and hold the cen-
ter of the stick or use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING  > FOCUS LEVER
SETTING.

The Selector
Press the selector up, right, down, or left
to highlight items. The up, right, down,
and left buttons also double as function
buttons Fn3 through Fn6 (P 295, 321).

4
 Parts of the Camera

The Shutter Speed and Sensitivity Dials

Press the dial lock release to release the
dial before rotating it to the desired set-
ting. Press the release again to lock the
dial in place.

Shutter speed
1

Before You Begin

Sensitivity
STILL/MOVIE mode dial
Rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to STILL
to take photos and to MOVIE to record
movies.

5
 The Exposure Compensation Dial
Rotate the dial to choose an exposure
compensation amount.

1
The Drive Dial
Before You Begin

Rotate the dial to choose from the follow-

ing the drive modes.

Mode P Mode P
u Panorama 111 CL Low-speed burst 105
ADV. Advanced filter 109 S Single frame 52
BKT Bracketing 103 h HDR 107
CH High-speed burst 105

6
 Parts of the Camera

The Command Dials

Rotate or press the command dials to:
Front command dial Rear command dial

Before You Begin

• Highlight menu items
• Choose the desired combina-
• Select menu tabs or page tion of shutter speed and aper-
through menus ture (program shift)
• Adjust aperture 1, 2 • Choose a shutter speed 2
• Adjust exposure compensation 2, 5
• Adjust settings in the quick menu
Rotate • Adjust sensitivity 2, 3
• Choose the size of the focus frame
• View other pictures during • Zoom in or out in full frame play-
playback back
• Zoom in or out in multi-frame
playback
• Switch back and forth between • Perform the function assigned
aperture and sensitivity 2, 3, 6 to the DIAL function button
• Press and hold to choose the op- • Zoom in on the active focus point 4
tion selected for D BUTTON/ • Press and hold to choose the4
DIAL SETTING > COMMAND manual focus mode focus display
Press
DIAL SETTING in the D (setup) • Zoom in on the active focus
menu point during playback
1 Lens not equipped with aperture ring; lens equipped with aperture ring and aperture set
to A (auto) and COMMAND selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE
RING SETTING (A); or ON selected for MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL.
2 Can be changed using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL SETTING.
3 Sensitivity dial rotated to C or ON selected for MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL.

7
 4 Available only if FOCUS CHECK is assigned to a function button.
5 Exposure compensation dial rotated to C or ON selected for MOVIE OPTIMIZED
CONTROL oL.
6 Can be used to switch back and forth between aperture, sensitivity, and exposure com-
pensation when exposure compensation dial is rotated to C or ON is selected for MOVIE
OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL.

N The rotation direction for the command dials can be selected using
1 D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION.
Before You Begin

8
 Parts of the Camera

The Indicator Lamp

Camera status is shown by the indicator
lamp.

1
Indicator lamp Camera status

Before You Begin

Glows green Focus locked.
Focus or slow shutter speed warning. Pictures can be
Blinks green
taken.
• Camera on: Recording pictures, or picture displayed for
confirmation after being taken with option other than
Blinks green and OFF selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > IMAGE DISP.
orange (additional pictures can be taken).
• Camera off: Uploading pictures to a smartphone or tab-
let. *
Recording pictures. No additional pictures can be taken
Glows orange
at this time.
Blinks orange Flash charging; flash will not fire when picture is taken.
Blinks red Lens or memory error.
* Displayed only if pictures are selected for upload.

N • Warnings may also appear in the display.

• The indicator lamp remains off while your eye is to the viewfinder.
• The B MOVIE SETTING  > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to
choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie re-
cording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.
• The indicator lamp blinks green whenever the displays are off during
interval-timer photography.

9
 The LCD Monitor
The LCD monitor can be tilted for eas-
ier viewing, but be careful not to touch
the wires or trap fingers or other objects
behind the monitor. Touching the wires
could cause camera malfunction.
1
N The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen that can be used for:
Before You Begin

• Touch photography (P 27)

• Focus area selection (P 26)
• Function selection (P 29)
• Movie optimized control oL (P 28)
• Playback (P 31)
“Tall” (Portrait) Orientation
The display can also be tilted to take pictures from high or low angles when
the camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall” (portrait) orientation.
• Press the tilt lock release and tilt the display as shown in Figure 1.
• To take high-angle shots, hold the camera in the orientation shown in
Figure 2.

Figure 1 Figure 2

10
 Parts of the Camera

The Eye Cup

To remove the eye cup, hold the buttons
on either side and slide eye cup up.

1
Focusing the Viewfinder

Before You Begin

If the indicators displayed in the viewfinder are blurred, put your
eye to the viewfinder and rotate the diopter adjustment control
until the display is in sharp focus.
To focus the viewfinder:
A Lift the diopter adjustment control.
B Rotate the control to adjust viewfinder focus.
C Return the control to its original position and lock it in place.

O Lift the control before use. Failure to observe this precaution could
cause product malfunction.

11
 Camera Displays
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed
during shooting.
O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
The Electronic Viewfinder
1
E F LM N O P Q S T X Y
Before You Begin

GHIJK R U V W Z
a
5 b
4
3
2 c
1
0

z d

e
y
x f
w

rq nml k j i hg

v ut s p o

12
 Camera Displays

A Crop factor .....................................................193 d Temperature warning ......................... 39, 393

B IS mode 2 .........................................................174 e Control lock 3 .................................................305
C Flash (TTL) mode .........................................346 f Boost mode ...................................................307
D Flash compensation ...................................346 g Power supply....................................................44
E Movie compression .....................................191 h Histogram .........................................................22
F Digital teleconverter ...................................175 i Battery level ......................................................47
G Self-timer indicator ............................168, 190 j Sensitivity ..........................................................96
H Continuous mode........................................105 k Exposure compensation ...............................99
I Shutter type ...................................................170 l Aperture...............................................73, 78, 80 1
J AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................155 m Distance indicator 2 ........................................93
K Bluetooth ON/OFF n Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 80

Before You Begin

L White balance ..............................................126 o TTL lock ..................................................181, 325
M AWB lock ........................................................302 p AE lock....................................................102, 302
N Film simulation ............................................122 q Metering ............................................................98
O F-Log/HLG recording ..................................194 r Shooting mode ...............................................72
P Dynamic range ............................................130 s Focus mode 2 ....................................................83
Q D-range priority ...........................................130 t Focus indicator 2 ..............................................84
R Image transfer status ........................249, 264 u Manual focus indicator 2 .......................83, 91
S Movie mode ........................................... 62, 188 v AF lock....................................................102, 302
T High-speed recording indicator ..............189 w Time code.......................................................216
U Recording time available/ x Microphone input channel..............186, 215
elapsed recording time ..............................62 y Recording level 2 ...........................................213
V Card slot options ................................... 40, 309 z Exposure indicator...................................80, 99
W Number of available frames 1...................394 0 Virtual horizon.................................................23
X Image size ......................................................118 1 Focus frame ............................................ 87, 101
Y File format......................................................191 2 Bluetooth host ..............................................249
Z Image quality................................................119 3 Location data download status..............310
a HEIF format ...................................................121 4 Depth-of-field preview...........................79, 93
b Date and time..................................48, 50, 273 5 Focus check ............................................ 94, 156
c Touch screen mode .............................. 26, 160
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(EVF).
3 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.

13
 The LCD Monitor
F G J K Q R

A B C DE H I L M NO P ST U

7
6 V
1 5 W
4
X
Before You Begin

3
Y
2
Z
a
1 b
c
d

0 e
z
y ts p o nm l k j i hg f

x w v u rq

14
 Camera Displays

A Crop factor .....................................................193 e Touch zoom 3 ....................................................30

B Location data download status..............310 f Temperature warning ......................... 39, 393
C Focus check ............................................ 94, 156 g Control lock 4..................................................305
D Depth-of-field preview...........................79, 93 h Battery level ......................................................47
E Image transfer status ........................249, 264 i Power supply....................................................44
F Movie compression .....................................191 j Sensitivity ..........................................................96
G Digital teleconverter ...................................175 k Histogram .........................................................22
H Bluetooth ON/OFF l Exposure compensation ...............................99
I Bluetooth host ..............................................249 m Distance indicator 2 ........................................93 1
J Movie mode ........................................... 62, 188 n Aperture...............................................73, 78, 80
K High-speed recording indicator ..............189 o Time code.......................................................216

Before You Begin

L Focus frame ............................................ 87, 101 p Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 80
M Recording time available/ q TTL lock ..................................................181, 325
elapsed recording time ..............................62 r AE lock....................................................102, 302
N Date and time..................................48, 50, 273 s Metering ............................................................98
O Card slot options ................................... 40, 309 t Shooting mode ...............................................72
P Number of available frames 1 ...................394 u Focus mode 2 ....................................................83
Q Image size ......................................................118 v Focus indicator 2 ..............................................84
R File format......................................................191 w Manual focus indicator 2 .......................83, 91
S Image quality................................................119 x AF lock....................................................102, 302
T HEIF format ...................................................121 y Microphone input channel..............186, 215
U Touch screen mode 3 ............................ 26, 160 z AF+MF indicator 2 .......................................155
V AWB lock ........................................................302 0 Shutter type ...................................................170
W White balance ..............................................126 1 Recording level 2 ...........................................213
X Film simulation ............................................122 2 Continuous mode........................................105
Y F-Log/HLG recording ..................................194 3 Self-timer indicator ............................168, 190
Z Dynamic range ............................................130 4 Exposure indicator...................................80, 99
a D-range priority ...........................................130 5 Flash (TTL) mode .........................................346
b Movie optimized control 3.............................28 6 Flash compensation ...................................346
c Virtual horizon.................................................23 7 IS mode 2 .........................................................174
d Boost mode ...................................................307
1 Shows “9999” if there is space for over 9999 frames.
2 Not displayed when ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS
MODE(LCD).
3 Camera functions can also be accessed via touch controls.
4 Displayed when controls have been locked by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button.
Control lock can be ended by pressing and holding the MENU/OK button again.

15
 Choosing a Display Mode
Press the VIEW MODE button to cycle
through the following display modes.
You can choose separate display modes
for shooting and playback.

1
N Use D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING in the setup menu to
Before You Begin

choose a display mode for the EVF and LCD monitor.

SHOOTING

Option Description
Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder
E EYE SENSOR on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns
the viewfinder off and LCD monitor on.
LCD ONLY LCD monitor on, viewfinder off.
EVF ONLY Viewfinder on, LCD monitor off.
Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder
EVF ONLY + E on; taking it away turns the viewfinder off. The LCD
monitor remains off.
Putting your eye to the viewfinder during shooting
turns the viewfinder on, but the LCD monitor is used for
E EYE SENSOR + LCD the display of images once you remove your eye from
IMAGE DISP. the viewfinder after shooting. The options selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP > IMAGE DISP. apply to display
in the LCD monitor.

N Go to D SCREEN SET-UP > VIEW MODE SETTING in the setup menu

and press the Q button to choose the view modes available.

16
 Camera Displays

PLAYBACK

Option Description
Putting your eye to the viewfinder turns the viewfinder
E EYE SENSOR on and the LCD monitor off ; taking your eye away turns
the viewfinder off and LCD monitor on.
LCD ONLY LCD monitor on, viewfinder off.
EVF ONLY Viewfinder on, LCD monitor off. 1

Before You Begin

The Eye Sensor
The eye sensor may respond to objects other
than your eye or to light shining directly on the
sensor.

Eye sensor

17
 Adjusting Display Brightness
The brightness and saturation of the viewfinder and LCD monitor
can be adjusted using the items in the D SCREEN SET-UP menu.
Choose EVF BRIGHTNESS or EVF COLOR to adjust viewfinder
brightness or saturation, LCD BRIGHTNESS or LCD COLOR to do
the same for the LCD monitor.
1
Display Rotation
Before You Begin

When ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP  > AUTOROTATE

DISPLAYS, the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor au-
tomatically rotate to match camera orientation.

18
 Camera Displays

The DISP/BACK Button

The DISP/BACK button controls the display
of indicators in the viewfinder and LCD
monitor.
N Indicators for the EVF and LCD must be
selected separately. To choose the EVF dis-
play, place your eye to the viewfinder while
using the DISP/BACK button.
1

Before You Begin

Viewfinder
Full screen Standard indicators

Dual display
(manual focus mode only)

19
 LCD Monitor
Standard indicators No indicators

1 12800
Before You Begin

12800

Dual display Info display

(manual focus mode only)

The Dual Display

The dual display consists of a large full-frame window and a
smaller close-up of the focus area.

20
 Camera Displays

Customizing the Standard Display

To choose the items shown in the standard indicator display:

1 Display standard indicators.

Use the DISP/BACK button to display standard indicators.

2 Select DISP. CUSTOM SETTING.

Select D SCREEN SET-UP  > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING in the 1
setup menu.

Before You Begin

3 Choose items.
Highlight items and press MENU/OK to select or deselect.
Item Default Item Default
FRAMING GUIDELINE R DUAL IS MODE R
FOCUS FRAME R TOUCH SCREEN MODE R
FOCUS INDICATOR R WHITE BALANCE R
AF DISTANCE INDICATOR R FILM SIMULATION R
MF DISTANCE INDICATOR R DYNAMIC RANGE R
HISTOGRAM R BOOST MODE R
LIVE VIEW HIGHLIGHT ALERT R FRAMES REMAINING R
SHOOTING MODE R IMAGE SIZE/QUALITY R
APERTURE/S-SPEED/ISO R MOVIE MODE & REC. TIME R
INFORMATION BACKGROUND R DIGITAL TELE-CONV. R
Expo. Comp. (Digit) R COMMUNICATION STATUS R
Expo. Comp. (Scale) R MIC LEVEL R
FOCUS MODE R GUIDANCE MESSAGE R
PHOTOMETRY R NO MEMORY CARD WARNING R
SHUTTER TYPE R DATE/TIME R
FLASH R BATTERY LEVEL R
CONTINUOUS MODE R FRAMING OUTLINE R

4 Press DISP/BACK to save changes.

5 Press DISP/BACK as needed to exit the menus and return to the

shooting display.

21
 Framing Outline
Enable FRAMING OUTLINE to make the borders of the frame easier to see
against dark backgrounds.
Histograms
Histograms show the distribution of tones in the image. Brightness is
shown by the horizontal axis, the number of pixels by the vertical axis.

1 Number of pixels
Before You Begin

Shadows Highlights
Pixel brightness

• Optimal exposure: Pixels are distributed in an even curve

throughout the tone range.
• Overexposed: Pixels are clustered on the right side of
the graph.
• Underexposed: Pixels are clustered on the left side of
the graph.

To view separate RGB histograms and a dis-

play showing areas of the frame that will be
overexposed at current settings superimposed
on the view through the lens, press the func-
tion button to which HISTOGRAM is assigned
(P 295, 321).
A Overexposed areas blink
B RGB histograms A B

22
 Camera Displays

Virtual Horizon
Check whether the camera is level. The display type can be cho-
sen using D SCREEN SET-UP  > ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING.
Use the virtual horizon to level the camera when mounting it on
a tripod or the like.
2D 3D
1

Before You Begin

Pitch Roll
• OFF: The virtual horizon is not displayed.
• 2D: A white line shows the amount the camera is tilted
left or right. The line turns green when the camera is level.
The line may vanish if the camera is tilted forward or back.
• 3D: The display shows whether the camera is tilted left or
right and forward or back.
N ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH can be assigned to a function button
and the button then used to switch between the 2D and 3D displays.

23
 Using the Menus
To display the menus, press MENU/OK.

1
The Menus
Before You Begin

Different menus are displayed during still photography, movie

recording, and playback.
IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT

STILL/MOVIE mode dial

rotated to STILL
Shooting
MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST
MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
FSELF-TIMER
MEDIA REC SETTING
HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
EXIT

STILL/MOVIE mode dial

rotated to MOVIE
PLAY BACK MENU
SWITCH SLOT
RAW CONVERSION
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
Playback CROP
RESIZE
PROTECT
EXIT

During playback

24
 Using the Menus

Selecting a Menu Tab

To navigate the menus:

1 Press MENU/OK to display the menus.

Before You Begin

IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT

2 Press the selector left to highlight the IMAGE QUALITY SETTING

IMAGE SIZE
tab for the current menu. IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT

Tab

3 Press the selector up or down to highlight the tab containing

the desired item.

4 Press the selector right to place the cursor in the menu.

N Use the front command dial to select menu tabs or page through
menus and the rear command dial to highlight menu items.

25
 Touch Screen Mode
The LCD monitor also functions as a touch screen.

Shooting Touch Controls

To enable touch controls, select ON for TOUCH SCREEN SETTINGS

D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > TOUCH TOUCH SCREEN SETTING

DOUBLE TAP SETTING
1 SCREEN SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN ON
TOUCH FUNCTION
TOUCH ZOOM OFF
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
SETTING. EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS
Before You Begin

EVF
The LCD monitor can be used to select the focus area while pic-
tures are being framed in the electronic viewfinder (EVF). Use
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING  > TOUCH SCREEN SETTING  > EVF
TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS to choose the area of the mon-
itor employed for touch controls.

N • When FACE DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING  >

g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING, you can choose the face used
for focus.
• You can choose the type of subject on which the camera preferential-
ly focuses when SUBJECT DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF
SETTING > SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.

26
 Touch Screen Mode

LCD Monitor
The operation performed can be selected
by tapping the touch screen mode indica-
tor in the display. Touch controls can be
used for the following operations:

Mode Description
1

Before You Begin

Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
TOUCH
In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your finger
SHOOTING
on the display.
• In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your
subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until
AF you tap the AF OFF icon.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you
tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap
AF OFF the AF OFF icon.
• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus
on the selected subject using autofocus.

Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
AREA
move to the selected point.

OFF Touch screen mode off.

O • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.

• Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (P 161).

27
 N • To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-
tor, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING  > TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.
• Touch control settings can be adjusted using G AF/MF SETTING >
TOUCH SCREEN MODE. For information on the touch controls
available during movie recording, see “Movie Recording (F TOUCH
SCREEN MODE; P 210)”.
1
MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Before You Begin

Selecting ON for B MOVIE SETTING  >

MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL or
tapping the movie-optimized mode but-
ton in the shooting display optimizes the
command dials and touch controls for
movie recording. This can be used to pre-
Movie-optimized
vent camera sounds being recorded with
mode button
movie footage.

• SHUTTER SPEED • WIND FILTER

• APERTURE • HEADPHONES VOLUME
• EXPOSURE COMPENSATION • F FILM SIMULATION
• ISO • F WHITE BALANCE
• INTERNAL MIC LEVEL • F IS MODE
ADJUSTMENT/EXTERNAL MIC • F IS MODE BOOST
LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
N • Enabling movie-optimized controls disables the aperture ring and
the shutter-speed, sensitivity, and exposure compensation dials.
• When movie-optimized control is enabled, the movie-optimized
mode button can be used to change shooting settings or disable
movie-optimized control.

28
 Touch Screen Mode

Touch Function
Functions can be assigned to the follow-
ing flick gestures in much the same way
as function buttons (P 321):
• Flick up: T-Fn1
• Flick left: T-Fn2
• Flick right: T-Fn3 1
• Flick down: T-Fn4

Before You Begin

N • In some cases, touch-function flick ges- INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
L R
tures display a menu; tap to select the 0
-6

desired option. -12

-20

-40
-50
dB

SET CANCEL

• Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable

touch-function gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >
TOUCH SCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION.

29
 Touch Zoom
If the lens supports touch zoom, you can
zoom in and out by touching the display.
Tap the touch zoom button in the display
to enable touch zoom.

1 Touch zoom is controlled using the but-

tons in the display.
Before You Begin

Button Description

Touch zoom Enable touch zoom.

Zoom in
Zoom in or out. Touch and hold to zoom in or out at a constant
speed.
Zoom out

The camera zooms in or out at a speed corresponding to the

Rocker switch
position of the rocker switch.

Disable Disable touch zoom.

N The rate at which the camera zooms in and out in response to the T
and  W buttons can be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >
LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING > CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (Fn).

30
 Touch Screen Mode

Playback Touch Controls

When ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING  > TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING > a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING, touch controls
can be used for the following playback operations:
• Swipe: Swipe a finger across the display to
view other images.
1

Before You Begin

• Pinch-out: Place two fingers on the display
and spread them apart to zoom in.

• Pinch-in: Place two fingers on the display

and slide them together to zoom out.

N Pictures can be zoomed out until the entire image is visible but no
further.
• Double-tap: Tap the display twice to zoom in
on the focus point.

• Drag: View other areas of the image during

playback zoom.

31
MEMO

32
First Steps

33
 Attaching the Strap
Attach the strap.
Attach the strap to the two strap clips as shown below.

2
First Steps

O To avoid dropping the camera, be sure the strap is correctly secured.

34
 Attaching a Lens
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
Remove the body cap from the camera
and the rear cap from the lens. Place the
lens on mount, keeping the marks on the
lens and camera aligned (A), and then
rotate the lens until it clicks into place
(B). 2
O • When attaching lenses, ensure that dust or other foreign matter does

First Steps
not enter the camera.
• Be careful not to touch the camera’s internal parts.
• Rotate the lens until it clicks securely into place.
• Do not press the lens release button while attaching the lens.
Removing Lenses
To remove the lens, turn the camera off, then
press the lens release button (A) and rotate
the lens as shown (B).

O To prevent dust accumulating on the lens

or inside the camera, replace the lens caps
and camera body cap when the lens is not
attached.
Lenses and Other Optional Accessories
The camera can be used with lenses and accessories for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.

O Observe the following precautions when attaching or removing (ex-

changing) lenses.
• Check that the lenses are free of dust and other foreign matter.
• Do not change lenses in direct sunlight or under another bright light
source. Light focused into the interior of the camera could cause it to
malfunction.
• Attach the lens caps before exchanging lenses.
• See the manual provided with the lens for information on use.
35
 Inserting the Battery
Insert the battery in the camera as described below.

1 Open the battery-chamber cover.

Slide the battery-chamber cover
latch as shown and open the bat-
tery-chamber cover.
O • Do not open the battery-chamber
cover when the camera is on. Fail-
2 ure to observe this precaution could
damage image files or memory
First Steps

cards.
• Do not use excessive force when
handling the battery-chamber cover.

2 Insert the battery as shown.

O • Insert the battery in the orientation
shown. Do not use force or attempt
to insert the battery upside down or
backwards.
• Confirm that the battery is securely
latched.

36
 Inserting the Battery

3 Close the battery-chamber cover.

Close and latch the cover.
O If the cover does not close, check that
the battery is in the correct orienta-
tion. Do not attempt to force the cov-
er shut.

Removing the Battery

Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and open the battery-cham- 2
ber cover.

First Steps
To remove the battery, press the battery latch
to the side, and slide the battery out of the
camera as shown.

O The battery may become hot when used in high-temperature environ-

ments. Observe caution when removing the battery.

37
 Inserting Memory Cards
Pictures are stored on memory cards (sold separately).
N The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two slots.
1 Open the memory card slot cover.
Unlatch and open the cover.

2
First Steps

O Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the
memory card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or de-
leted from the card. Failure to observe this precaution could dam-
age the card.

2 Insert the memory card.

Holding the card in the orientation
shown, slide it in until it clicks into
place at the back of the slot. Close
and latch the memory card slot cover.

O Be sure card is in the correct orientation; do not insert at an angle

or use force.

38
 Inserting Memory Cards

Removing Memory Cards

Turn the camera off and open the memory card
slot cover. Eject the card by pressing it in with a
finger and then slowly releasing it; the card can
then be removed by hand.

O • Press the center of the card.

• Suddenly removing your finger from the card could cause the card to
fall from the slot. Remove your finger slowly. 2
• If the camera displays a p icon, the memory card may be hot to the

First Steps
touch. Wait for the card to cool before removing it.

39
 Using Two Cards
The camera can be used with two cards, one in each of its two
slots. At default settings, photos are saved to the card in the sec-
ond slot only when the card in the first slot is full. This can be
changed using D SAVE DATA SET-UP > x CARD SLOT SETTING.
Option Description Display
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in
the first slot is full. If the second slot is selected for D SAVE
2 SEQUENTIAL DATA SET-UP  > SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL),
(default) recording will start on the card in the second slot and
First Steps

switch to the first slot when the card in the second slot
is full.

BACKUP Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.

RAW pictures are recorded to the card in the first slot

and JPEG or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. RAW+JPEG
SEPARATE This setting takes effect only when FINE  + RAW or
NORMAL + RAW is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY
SETTING > IMAGE QUALITY.
RAW+HEIF

The card used to store movies can be selected using B MOVIE

SETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING.

40
 Inserting Memory Cards

Compatible Memory Cards

• The camera can be used with SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory
cards. Both the UHS-I and UHS-II bus interfaces are supported.
• UHS-II cards are recommended for high-speed burst photography.
• The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary
with the settings selected (P 68).
• A list of supported memory cards is available on the Fujifilm
website. For details, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
2
O • Do not turn the camera off or remove the memory card while the memo-
ry card is being formatted or data are being recorded to or deleted from

First Steps
the card. Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card.
• Memory cards can be locked, making it
impossible to format the card or to record
or delete images. Before inserting a mem-
ory card, slide the write-protect switch to
the unlocked position.
• Memory cards are small and can be swallowed; keep out of reach of
children. If a child swallows a memory card, seek medical assistance
immediately.
• miniSD or microSD adapters that are larger or smaller than memory
cards may not eject normally; if the card does not eject, take the cam-
era to an authorized service representative. Do not forcibly remove
the card.
• Do not affix labels or other objects to memory cards. Peeling labels
can cause camera malfunction.
• Movie recording may be interrupted with some types of memory card.
• Formatting a memory card in the camera creates a folder in which
pictures are stored. Do not rename or delete this folder or use a com-
puter or other device to edit, delete, or rename image files. Always
use the camera to delete pictures; before editing or renaming files,
copy them to a computer and edit or rename the copies, not the
originals. Renaming the files on the camera can cause problems
during playback.

41
 Charging the Battery
For reasons of safety, the battery is not charged at ship-
ment. The camera will not function if the battery is not
charged; be sure to charge the battery before use. Before
charging the battery, turn the camera off.
O • An NP-W235 rechargeable battery is supplied with the camera.
• Charging takes about 180 minutes.
2 1 Attach the plug adapter to the AC power adapter.
Attach the plug adapter as shown, making
sure that it is fully inserted and clicks into
First Steps

place on the AC power adapter terminals.

O • The supplied plug adapter is for use exclu-
sively with the AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
Do not use it with other devices.
• The shape of the plug adapter varies with
the country of sale.

2 Charge the battery.

Connect the camera to the supplied AC power adapter using
the supplied USB cable. Then plug the AC power adapter into
an indoor power outlet.

O • Connect the cable to the camera’s USB connector (Type-C).

• Be sure the connectors are fully inserted.
42
 Charging the Battery

Charge Status
The indicator lamp shows battery charge status
as follows:
Indicator lamp Battery status
On Battery charging
Off Charging complete
Blinks Charging error

First Steps

43
 O • The supplied AC power adapter is compatible with power supplies of
100 to 240 V (a plug adapter may be needed for overseas use).
• Do not use the AC power adapter or USB cable with other devices, as
this could cause malfunction.
• Do not affix labels or other objects to the battery. Failure to observe
this precaution could make it impossible to remove the battery from
the camera.
• Do not short the battery terminals. The battery could overheat.
• Read the cautions in “The Battery and Power Supply”.
• Use only genuine Fujifilm rechargeable batteries designated for use
2 in this camera. Failure to observe this precaution could result in prod-
uct malfunction.
First Steps

• Do not remove the labels from the battery or attempt to split or peel
the outer casing.
• The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Charge the
battery one or two days before use.
• If the battery fails to hold a charge, it has reached the end of its
charging life and must be replaced.
• Unplug the AC power adapter from the power outlet when it is not
in use.
• If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you may find
that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a charge. Charge
the battery regularly.
• Remove dirt from the battery terminals with a clean, dry cloth. Failure
to observe this precaution could prevent the battery from charging.
• Note that charging times increase at low or high temperatures.
• Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING > Bluetooth
ON/OFF in the network/USB settings menu increases the drain on
the battery.

N • If the camera is turned on during charging,

charging will end and the USB connection
will instead be used to power the camera.
The battery level will begin to gradually
decline (P 270).
• The camera will display a “power supply” icon when powered via USB.

44
 Charging the Battery

Charging via Computer

The camera can be charged via USB. USB charging is available with com-
puters with a manufacturer-approved operating system and USB interface.

First Steps
Leave the computer on during charging.
O• The battery will not charge while the camera is on.
• Connect the supplied USB cable.
• Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not use a USB hub
or keyboard.
• Charging stops if the computer enters sleep mode. To resume
charging, activate the computer and disconnect and reconnect the
USB cable.
• Charging may not be supported depending on the model of com-
puter, computer settings, and the computer’s current state.
• The battery takes about 600 minutes to charge with a charging input
of 5 V/500 mA.

45
 Turning the Camera On and Off
Use the ON/OFF switch to turn the camera on and off.
Slide the switch to ON to turn the camera
on, or to OFF to turn the camera off.

2 O Fingerprints and other marks on the lens or viewfinder can affect pic-
tures or the view through the viewfinder. Keep the lens and viewfinder
First Steps

clean.

N • Pressing the a button during shooting starts playback.

• Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.
• The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed
for the length of time selected for D POWER MANAGEMENT  >
AUTO POWER OFF. To reactivate the camera after it has turned off
automatically, press the shutter button halfway or turn the ON/OFF
switch to OFF and then back to ON.

46
 Checking the Battery Level
After turning the camera on, check the battery level in the
display.
Battery level is shown as follows:

2
Indicator Description

First Steps
e Battery partially discharged.
f Battery about 80% full.
g Battery about 60% full.
h Battery about 40% full.
i Battery about 20% full.
i Low battery. Charge as soon as possible.
(red)
j Battery exhausted. Turn camera off and recharge battery.
(blinks red)

47
 Basic Setup
When you turn the camera on for the first time, you can
choose a language and set the camera clock. Follow the
steps below when turning the camera on for the first time.

1 Turn the camera on.

A language-selection dialog will be
displayed.
2
First Steps

2 Choose a language.
Highlight a language and press
MENU/OK.

3 Choose a time zone.

When prompted, choose a time zone AREA SETTING

and turn daylight savings time on or

off using the selector, then highlight
SET and press MENU/OK. BERLIN/PARIS
AREA SETTING GMT ±0:00
DAYLIGHT SAVINGS OFF
SET
NO

N To skip this step, press DISP/BACK.

48
 Basic Setup

4 Set the clock.

DATE/TIME
GMT +1:00 BERLIN/PARIS

2022 . 12 . 31 12 00 AM 12h

SET NO

5 View information on the smartphone app.

• The camera will display a QR code APPLICATION 2
you can scan with your smartphone IMAGES CAN BE EASILY TRANSFERRED

First Steps
TO THE SMARTPHONE.
to open a website where you can
download the smartphone app.
SCAN QR CODE TO ACQUIRE THE APP.
• Press MENU/OK to exit to the shoot-
ing display. SET

N Use the smartphone app to download pictures from the camera

or control the camera remotely (P 249).

6 Format the memory card (P 272).

O Format memory cards before first use, and be sure to reformat all
memory cards after using them in a computer or other device.

N If the battery is removed for an extended period, the camera clock will
be reset and the language-selection dialog will be displayed when the
camera is turned on.

49
 Basic Setup

Choosing a Different Language

To change the language:

1 Display language options.

Select D USER SETTING > Qa.

2 Choose a language.
Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.

Changing the Time and Date

2
To set the camera clock:
First Steps

1 Display DATE/TIME options.

Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME.

2 Set the clock.

Press the selector left or right to highlight the year, month,
day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. Press
MENU/OK to set the clock.

50
Basic Photography and
Playback

51
 Taking Photographs (Mode P)
This section describes how to take pictures using program
AE (mode P). See pages 72–81 for information on S, A,
and M modes.

1 Rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to

STILL.

3 2 Slide the lens aperture mode switch

to A.
Basic Photography and Playback

3 Rotate the shutter speed dial to A.

O To use the shutter speed dial, press the
dial lock release and rotate the dial to
the desired setting.

P will appear in the display.

52
 Taking Photographs (Mode P)

4 Rotate the drive dial to S.

5 Rotate the sensitivity dial to A.

Basic Photography and Playback

6 Rotate the focus mode selector to S.

53
 7 Ready the camera.
• Hold the camera steady with both
hands and brace your elbows
against your sides. Shaking or un-
steady hands can blur your shots.

• To prevent pictures that are out of

focus or too dark (underexposed),
keep your fingers and other objects
away from the lens and AF-assist
3 illuminator.
Basic Photography and Playback

8 Frame the picture.

Lenses with Zoom Rings
Use the zoom ring to frame the picture in
the display. Rotate the ring left to zoom
out, right to zoom in.

54
 Taking Photographs (Mode P)

9 Focus.
Press the shutter button halfway to
set focus and exposure.

Focus indicator
Focus frame
• If the camera is able to focus, the focus frame and focus indicator
will glow green.
• If the camera is unable to focus, the focus frame will turn red, s 3
will be displayed, and the focus indicator will blink white.
N • If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist illuminator may light to

Basic Photography and Playback

assist the focus operation.
• Focus and exposure will lock when the shutter button is
pressed halfway. Focus and exposure remain locked while the
button is kept in this position (AF/AE lock).
• The camera will focus on subjects at any distance in the macro
and standard focus ranges for the lens.

10 Shoot.
Smoothly press the shutter button the rest of the way down
to take the picture.

55
 Viewing Pictures
Pictures can be viewed in the viewfinder or LCD monitor.
To view pictures full frame, press a.
100-0001

Additional pictures can be viewed by pressing the selector left

3 or right or rotating the front command dial. Press the selector or
rotate the dial right to view pictures in the order recorded, left to
Basic Photography and Playback

view pictures in reverse order. Keep the selector pressed to scroll

rapidly to the desired frame.
N Pictures taken using other cameras are marked with a m (“gift image”)
icon to warn that they may not display correctly and that playback
zoom may not be available.
Two Memory Cards
If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a button
to choose a card for playback. You can also select a card using the C PLAY
BACK MENU > SWITCH SLOT option.

56
 Viewing Pictures

HDMI Output
Camera shooting and playback displays can be output to HDMI
devices.

Connecting to HDMI Devices

Connect the camera to TVs or other HDMI devices using a
third-party HDMI cable.

1 Turn the camera off.

2 Connect the cable as shown below.

3
Insert into
HDMI connector

Basic Photography and Playback

Insert into HDMI Micro
connector (Type D)

3 Configure the device for HDMI input as described in the doc-

umentation supplied with the device.

4 Turn the camera on. The contents of the camera display will
be shown on the HDMI device. The camera display turns off
in playback mode (P 58).
O • Making sure the connectors are fully inserted.
• Use an HDMI cable no more than 1.5 m (4.9 ft.) long.

57
 Viewing Pictures

Shooting
Display live view or movie footage on a TV or save it to an exter-
nal recorder that supports HDMI input.

Playback
To start playback, press the camera a button. The camera mon-
itor turns off and pictures and movies are output to the HDMI
device. Note that the camera volume controls have no effect on
sounds played on the TV; use the television volume controls to
adjust the volume.

3
N Some televisions may briefly display a black screen when movie play-
back begins.
Basic Photography and Playback

58
 Deleting Pictures
Use the b button to delete pictures.
O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or
copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.

1 With a picture displayed full frame, press the b button and

select FRAME.
ERASE

FRAME
SELECTED FRAMES
ALL FRAMES

Basic Photography and Playback

2 Press the selector left or right to scroll through pictures and
press MENU/OK to delete (a confirmation dialog is not dis-
played). Repeat to delete additional pictures.
N • Protected pictures cannot be deleted. Remove protection from any
pictures you wish to delete (P 234).
• Pictures can also be deleted from the menus using the C PLAY BACK
MENU > ERASE option (P 230).

59
MEMO

60
Movie Recording and
Playback

61
 Recording Movies
Record movies with sound.

Recording Movies
Movies can be recorded by pressing the shutter button when the
STILL/MOVIE mode dial is rotated to MOVIE or by pressing a function
button to which MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE is assigned.

The STILL/MOVIE Mode Dial (MOVIE)

For access to a full range of camera settings when filming movies,
rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to MOVIE and record movies by
pressing the shutter button.

4 1 Rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to

MOVIE.
Movie Recording and Playback

2 Slide the lens aperture mode switch

to A.

62
 Recording Movies

3 Rotate the shutter speed dial to A.

AUTO will appear in the display.

4 Rotate the sensitivity dial to A.

4

Movie Recording and Playback

5 Rotate the focus mode selector to C.

O To use the shutter speed and sensitivity dials, press the dial lock
release and rotate the dial to the desired setting.
N These settings can also be adjusted using touch controls (P 28).

63
 6 Press the shutter button all the way
down.
Recording will start.
• A recording indicator (V) is dis-
played while recording is in prog-
ress.
• The borders of the display turn Recording time
red during movie recording, green
Time remaining
during high-speed recording.
• The time remaining is shown by a countdown display, while
another display counts up to show the recording time.

7 Press the button again to end recording. Recording ends

automatically when the maximum length is reached or the
4 memory card is full.
Movie Recording and Playback

64
 Recording Movies

Using a Function Button (MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE)

Use the function button to which MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE
is assigned to quickly and easily record movies while in still pho-
tography mode.
N The camera automatically selects focus mode C (AF-C); exposure is
adjusted automatically.

1 Assign MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE to a function button

(P 321).
2 Press the selected button to start re-
cording.
• A recording indicator (V) is dis-
played while recording is in prog-
ress.
4
• The borders of the display turn
red during movie recording, green Recording time

Movie Recording and Playback

during high-speed recording.
Time remaining
• The time remaining is shown by a countdown display, while
another display counts up to show the recording time.

3 Press the button again to end recording. Recording ends

automatically when the maximum length is reached or the
memory card is full.

65
 O • Sound is recorded via the built-in microphone or an optional external
microphone. Do not cover the microphone during recording.
• Note that the microphone may pick up lens noise and other sounds
made by the camera during recording.
• Vertical or horizontal streaks may appear in movies containing very
bright subjects. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
N • To monitor audio with headphones during recording, you will need
to convert the USB connector to an audio jack using the supplied
headphone adapter.
• The indicator lamp lights while recording is in progress (the B MOVIE
SETTING > TALLY LIGHT option can be used to choose the lamp—
indicator or AF-assist—that lights during movie recording and
whether the lamp blinks or remains steady). During recording, you
can change exposure compensation by up to ±2 EV and adjust zoom
using the zoom ring on the lens (if available).
4 • To prevent the borders of the display changing color during mov-
ie recording, select OFF for B MOVIE SETTING  > F REC FRAME
Movie Recording and Playback

INDICATOR.
• While recording is in progress, you can:
- Adjust sensitivity
- Refocus using any of the following methods:
• Press the shutter button halfway
• Press a function button to which AF-ON is assigned
• Use touch screen controls
- Display a histogram or artificial horizon by pressing the button to
which HISTOGRAM or ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH has been as-
signed
• Recording may be unavailable at some settings, while in other cases
settings may not apply during recording.
• To choose the focus area for movie recording, select G AF/MF
SETTING > FOCUS AREA and use the focus stick (focus lever) and
rear command dial (P 87).

66
 Recording Movies

Temperature Warnings
The camera automatically turns off to protect itself when its temperature or
the temperature of the battery rises. If a temperature warning is displayed,
image noise may increase. Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool before
turning it on again.
Using an External Microphone
Sound can be recorded with external micro-
phones that connect using jacks 3.5  mm in
diameter; microphones that require plug-in
power cannot be used. See the microphone
manual for details.

XLR Microphone Adapters

The camera can be used with TEAC TASCAM CA-XLR2d-F XLR microphone
adapters. For more information, visit the TASCAM website.
4
https://tascam.jp/int/product/ca-xlr2d/#CA-XLR2d_Website

Movie Recording and Playback

67
 Recording Movies

Adjusting Movie Settings

Movie settings can be adjusted from the movie menus or using
the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus (P 24).
• Use the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo menus to quickly
adjust settings when recording movies via a button to which
MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE has been assigned (P 183).
• The movie menus contain options for use when recording mov-
ies via the shutter button with the STILL/MOVIE mode dial rotated
to MOVIE (P 187).
• Settings such as frame rate and frame size can be adjusted us-
ing MOVIE MODE.
• Use MEDIA REC SETTING for such tasks as choosing the file
type, bit rate, and the destination card slot.
4 • Focus mode is selected using the focus mode selector. Regard-
less of the option selected, the camera will automatically switch
Movie Recording and Playback

to C when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT DETECTION ON

is chosen for G AF/MF SETTING  > g FACE/EYE DETECTION
SETTING or SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING. Note, howev-
er, that choosing M when FACE DETECTION ON or SUBJECT
DETECTION ON is selected disables face and subject detection.
O • Changes made using the B MOVIE SETTING item in the photo
menus also apply to the movie menus. Changes made in one set of
menus automatically apply in the other.
• The type of memory card supported varies with the option select for
B MOVIE SETTING > MEDIA REC SETTING.
- Movies with a bit rate of 360 Mbps can be recorded to cards with a
Video Speed Class of V60 or better.
- Movies with a bit rate of 100 or 200 Mbps can be recorded to cards
with a UHS Speed Class of 3 or better.
Depth of Field
To soften backgrounds, set aperture as wide as possible. Aperture can be
adjusted manually at settings other than A.

68
 Viewing Movies
View movies on the camera.
In full-frame playback, movies are identi-
fied by a W icon. Press the selector down
to start movie playback.
PLAY AUDIO SET.

The following operations can be per-

formed while a movie is displayed:

4
Playback in Playback
Selector Full-frame playback

Movie Recording and Playback

x)
progress ((x (y)
paused (y
View photo
Up End playback
information
Down Start playback Pause playback Start/resume playback
Single frame rewind/
Left/right View other pictures Adjust speed
advance

Progress is shown in the display during 29m59s

playback.
O Do not cover the speaker during playback.
STOP PAUSE

N • Press MENU/OK to pause playback and display volume controls. Press

the selector up or down to adjust the volume; press MENU/OK again
to resume playback. Volume can also be adjusted using D SOUND
SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME.
• To listen to audio with headphones, you will need to convert the USB
connector to an audio jack using the supplied headphone adapter.
• To view movies on a television connected via HDMI instead of in the
camera monitor, press the a button (P 57).
69
 Viewing Movies

Playback Speed
29m59s
Press the selector left or right to adjust play-
back speed during playback. Speed is shown
by the number of arrows (M or N).

Arrows

4
Movie Recording and Playback

70
Taking Photographs

71
 P, S, A, and M Modes
P, S, A, and M modes give you varying degrees of control
over shutter speed and aperture.

Mode P: Program AE
Let the camera choose shutter speed and aperture for optimal
exposure. Other values that produce the same exposure can be
selected with program shift.

1 Rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to

STILL.

2 Slide the lens aperture mode switch

5 to A.
Taking Photographs

3 Rotate the shutter speed dial to A.

P will appear in the display.

72
 P, S, A, and M Modes

O • If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed and aperture displays will show “– – –”.
• To use the shutter speed dial, press the dial lock release and rotate the
dial to the desired setting.
• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, select AUTO for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE SETTING.
Program Shift
If desired, you can rotate the rear command dial
to select other combinations of shutter speed
and aperture without altering exposure (pro-
gram shift).

Aperture
Shutter speed

O Program shift is not available in any of the following circumstances:

• When TTL is selected for F FLASH SETTING > FLASH FUNCTION 5
SETTING
• When an auto option is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING >

Taking Photographs
DYNAMIC RANGE
• In movie mode
N To cancel program shift, turn the camera off.

73
 Mode S: Shutter-Priority AE
Choose a shutter speed and let the camera adjust aperture for
optimal exposure.

1 Rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to

STILL.

2 Slide the lens aperture mode switch

to A.

5 3 Rotate the shutter speed dial to se-

lect a shutter speed.
Taking Photographs

S will appear in the display.

74
 P, S, A, and M Modes

O • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected shutter

speed, aperture will be displayed in red.
• If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the aper-
ture display will show “– – –”.
• To use the shutter speed dial, press the dial lock release and rotate the
dial to the desired setting.
• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, select AUTO for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE SETTING.
N • Shutter speed can also be adjusted in increments of 1⁄3 EV by rotating
the rear command dial.
• Shutter speed can be adjusted while the AFON button is pressed or
the shutter button is pressed halfway.
• At shutter speeds slower than 1 second, a count-down timer will be
displayed while the exposure is in progress.
• To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING  > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
• The picture will go out of focus if the camera is moved during a long 5
time-exposure; use of a tripod is recommended.

Taking Photographs
Time (T)
Choose a shutter speed of T  (time) for long time-exposures.
Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent the camera moving
during the exposure.

1 Set shutter speed to T.

75
 2 Rotate the rear command dial to
choose a shutter speed.

3 Press the shutter button all the way down to take a picture
at the selected shutter speed. At speeds of 1 s or slower, a
count-down timer will be displayed while the exposure is in
progress.
N To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that this
may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.

Bulb (B)
5 Choose a shutter speed of B (bulb) for long time-exposures in
which you open and close the shutter manually. Use of a tripod
Taking Photographs

is recommended to prevent the camera moving during the ex-

posure.

1 Set shutter speed to B.

76
 P, S, A, and M Modes

2 Press the shutter button all the way down.

• The shutter will remain open for up to 60 minutes while the
shutter button is pressed.
• The display shows the time elapsed since the exposure
started.
• Releasing the shutter button closes the shutter, ending the
exposure. Processing will begin, and the camera will display
the processing time remaining.
O Bulb photography is not available in drive modes other than STILL
IMAGE or when the electronic shutter is selected for A SHOOTING
SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE.

N • Selecting an aperture of A fixes shutter speed at 30 s.

• To reduce “noise” (mottling) in long time-exposures, select ON for
H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING  > LONG EXPOSURE NR. Note that
this may increase the time needed to record images after shooting.
5
Using a Remote Release
A remote release can be used for long time-ex-

Taking Photographs
posures. When using an optional RR-100 re-
mote release or an electronic release from
third-party suppliers, connect it to the camera’s
remote release connector.

77
 Mode A: Aperture-Priority AE
Choose an aperture and let the camera adjust shutter speed for
optimal exposure.

1 Rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to

STILL.

2 Rotate the shutter speed dial to A.

5
3 Slide the lens aperture mode switch
Taking Photographs

to Z.

A will appear in the display.

4 Rotate the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture.

78
 P, S, A, and M Modes

O • If the correct exposure cannot be achieved at the selected aperture,

shutter speed will be displayed in red.
• If the subject is outside the metering range of the camera, the shutter
speed display will show “– – –”.
• To use the shutter speed dial, press the dial lock release and rotate the
dial to the desired setting.
• If the lens is not equipped with an aperture ring, select MANUAL for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE SETTING.
N Aperture can be adjusted even while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
Previewing Depth of Field
When PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD is assigned
to a function button, pressing the button dis-
plays a L icon and stops aperture down to the
selected setting, allowing depth of field to be
previewed in the display.

Taking Photographs

79
 Mode M: Manual Exposure
In manual mode, the user controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Shots can be deliberately overexposed (brighter) or underexposed
(darker), opening the door for a variety of individual creative ex-
pression. The amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed
at current settings is shown by the exposure indicator; adjust shut-
ter speed and aperture until the desired exposure is reached.

1 Rotate the STILL/MOVIE mode dial to

STILL.

2 Slide the lens aperture mode switch

to Z.
5
Taking Photographs

3 Rotate the shutter speed dial to se-

lect a shutter speed other than A.

M will appear in the display.

80
 P, S, A, and M Modes

4 Rotate the shutter speed dial to choose a shutter speed and

the lens aperture ring to choose an aperture.
N The manual exposure display includes an exposure indicator that
shows the amount the picture would be under- or over-exposed
at current settings.

O To use the shutter speed dial, press the dial lock release and rotate the
dial to the desired setting.
N Shutter speed can be adjusted in increments of 1⁄3 EV by rotating the
rear command dial.
Exposure Preview
To preview exposure in the LCD monitor, select PREVIEW EXP./WB for
D SCREEN SET-UP > PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE.

Taking Photographs
N Select an option other than PREVIEW EXP./WB when using the flash
or on other occasions on which exposure may change when the pic-
ture is taken.

81
 Autofocus
Take pictures using autofocus.

1 Rotate the focus mode selector to S

or C (P 83).

2 Choose an AF mode (P 85).

3 Choose the position and size of the

focus frame (P 87).

5
4 Take pictures.
Taking Photographs

82
 Autofocus

Focus Mode
Use the focus mode selector to choose
how the camera focuses.

Choose from the following options:

Mode Description
S Single AF: Focus locks while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
(AF-S) Choose for stationary subjects.
Continuous AF: Focus is continually adjusted to reflect changes in
C the distance to the subject while the shutter button is pressed
(AF-C)
halfway. Use for subjects that are in motion.
Manual: Focus manually using the lens focus ring. Choose for man-
M ual control of focus or in situations in which the camera is unable
(manual)
to focus using autofocus (P 91). 5
N • Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when

Taking Photographs
the lens is in manual focus mode.
• If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF, focus will be ad-
justed continuously in modes S and C even when the shutter button
is not pressed.

83
 The Focus Indicator
Focus status is shown by the focus indicator.
Focus indicator Focus status
( ) Camera focusing.
Subject in focus; focus locked (focus
z (lights green)
mode S).
Subject in focus (focus mode C).
(z) (lights green) Focus is automatically adjusted for Focus indicator
changes in distance to subject.
A (blinks white) Camera unable to focus.
j Manual focus (focus mode M).

5
Taking Photographs

84
 Autofocus

Autofocus Options (AF Mode)

Focus can be adapted to a variety of subjects by changing the
combination of settings selected for focus and AF modes.

1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.

2 Select G AF/MF SETTING > AF MODE.

3 Choose an AF mode.
How the camera focuses depends on the focus mode.
Focus Mode S (AF-S)
Option Description Sample image

Camera focuses on subject in

r selected focus point. Use for pin-
SINGLE POINT point focus on selected subject.
5
Camera focuses on subject in se-

Taking Photographs
lected focus zone. Focus zones in-
y clude multiple focus points, mak-
ZONE ing it easier to focus on subjects in
motion.

Camera focuses automatically on

z high-contrast subjects; display
WIDE shows areas in focus.

Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-

j play (P 87, 88) to cycle through AF modes in the following
ALL order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z WIDE.

85
 Focus Mode C (AF-C)
Option Description Sample image

Focus tracks subject at selected fo-

r cus point. Use for subjects moving
SINGLE POINT toward or away from camera.

Camera tracks focus in selected fo-

y cus zone. Use for subjects that are
ZONE moving fairly predictably.

z Focus tracks subjects moving

TRACKING through wide area of frame.
5
Taking Photographs

Rotate the rear command dial in the focus-point selection dis-

j play (P 87, 88) to cycle through AF modes in the following
ALL order: r SINGLE POINT, y ZONE, and z TRACKING.

86
 Autofocus

Focus-Point Selection
Choose a focus point for autofocus.

Viewing the Focus-Point Display

1 Press MENU/OK and go to the shooting menu.

2 Select G AF/MF SETTING  > FOCUS AREA to view the fo-

cus-point display.

3 Use the focus stick (focus lever) and rear command dial to
choose a focus area.
N The focus point can also be selected using touch controls (P 26).
Selecting a Focus Point
Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
the focus point and the rear command 5
dial to choose the size of the focus frame.

Taking Photographs
The procedure varies with the option se-
lected for AF mode.

Focus stick Rear command dial

AF mode

Tilt Press Rotate Press

Choose from 6
r frame sizes Restore original
Select focus Select center Choose from 3 size
y point focus point frame sizes

z —

87
 N • Manual focus-point selection is not available when z WIDE/TRACKING
is selected in focus mode S.
• If j ALL is selected for AF mode, you can rotate the rear command
dial in the focus-point selection display to cycle through AF modes
in the following order: r SINGLE POINT (6 frame sizes), y ZONE
(3 frame sizes), and either z WIDE (focus mode S) or z TRACKING
(focus mode C).

The Focus-Point Display

The focus-point display varies with the option selected for AF
mode.
N Focus frames are shown by small squares (), focus zones by the large
squares.
AF mode
r SINGLE POINT y ZONE z WIDE/TRACKING

5
Taking Photographs

Number of points avail- Choose from zones with Position focus frame over
able can be selected using 7 × 7, 5 × 5, or 3 × 3 focus subject you want to track
G AF/MF SETTING  > points. using continuous AF.
NUMBER OF FOCUS
POINTS.

88
 Autofocus

Autofocus
Although the camera boasts a high-precision autofocus system, it may be
unable to focus on the subjects listed below.
• Very shiny subjects such as mirrors or car bodies.
• Subjects photographed through a window or other reflective object.
• Dark subjects and subjects that absorb rather than reflect light, such as
hair or fur.
• Insubstantial subjects, such as smoke or flame.
• Subjects that show little contrast with the background.
• Subjects positioned in front of or behind a high-contrast object that is
also in the focus frame (for example, a subject photographed against a
backdrop of highly contrasting elements).

Taking Photographs

89
 Autofocus

Checking Focus
To zoom in on the current focus area for precise
focus, press the center of the rear command
dial. Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose
another focus area. Press the center of the rear
command dial again to cancel zoom.

Normal display Focus zoom

N • In focus mode S, zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command

dial.
• The focus stick can be used to select the focus area while zoom is in
5 effect.
• In focus mode S, select r SINGLE POINT for AF MODE.
• Focus zoom is not available in focus mode C or when G AF/MF
Taking Photographs

SETTING > PRE-AF is on.

• Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING  > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING to
change the function performed by the center of the rear command
dial. You can also assign its default function to other controls (P 321).

90
 Manual Focus
Adjust focus manually.

1 Rotate the focus mode selector to M.

j will appear in the display.

2 Focus manually using the lens focus

ring. Rotate the ring left to reduce 5
the focus distance, right to increase.

Taking Photographs
A

3 Take pictures.

N • Use D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING to

reverse the direction of rotation of the focus ring.
• Regardless of the option selected, manual focus will be used when
the lens is in manual focus mode.

91
 Quick Focus
• To use autofocus to focus on the subject in the selected focus area, press
the button to which focus lock or AF-ON has been assigned (the size of
the focus area can be chosen with the rear command dial).
• In manual focus mode, you can use this feature to quickly focus on a cho-
sen subject using either single or continuous AF according to the option
chosen for G AF/MF SETTING > xF INSTANT AF SETTING.

5
Taking Photographs

92
 Manual Focus

Checking Focus
A variety of options are available for checking focus in manual
focus mode.

The Manual Focus Indicator

The white line indicates the distance to the subject in the fo-
cus area (in meters or feet according to the option selected for
D SCREEN SET-UP > FOCUS SCALE UNITS in the setup menu),
the blue bar the depth of field, or in other words the distance in
front of and behind the subject that appears to be in focus.
Focus distance
(white line)

Depth of field
5

Taking Photographs
N • If both AF DISTANCE INDICATOR and MF DISTANCE INDICATOR
are selected in the D SCREEN SET-UP  > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING
list, the manual focus indicator can also be viewed using the depth-
of-field indicator in the standard display. Use the DISP/BACK button to
display standard indicators.
• Use the G AF/MF SETTING > xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE option
to choose how depth of field is displayed. Choose FILM FORMAT
BASIS to help you make practical assessments of depth of field for
pictures that will be viewed as prints and the like, PIXEL BASIS to
help you assess depth of field for pictures that will be viewed at high
resolutions on computers or other electronic displays.

93
 Focus Zoom
If ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING  > FOCUS CHECK, the
camera will automatically zoom in on the selected focus area
when the focus ring is rotated. Press the center of the rear com-
mand dial to exit zoom.
N • Use the focus stick (focus lever) to choose another focus area.
• Zoom can be adjusted by rotating the rear command dial. Zoom can-
not, however, be adjusted when DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE or DIGITAL
MICROPRISM is selected for MF assist.

MF Assist

Use G AF/MF SETTING  > MF ASSIST (P 156) in the photo

menus or G AF/MF SETTING  > F MF ASSIST (P 208) in the
movie menus to choose a focus check option.

5 N The focus check options for movies differ from those for still photog-
raphy.
Taking Photographs

• DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE: Displays a split image

in the center of the frame. Frame the
subject in the split-image area and ro-
tate the focus ring until the four parts
of the split image are correctly aligned.
• DIGITAL MICROPRISM: A grid pattern that
emphasizes blur is displayed when the
subject is out of focus, disappearing to
be replaced by a sharp image when the
subject is in focus.

94
 Manual Focus

• FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT: Highlights high-con-

trast outlines. Rotate the focus ring until
the subject is highlighted.

• FOCUS METER: A meter is displayed below

the focus point indicating whether fo-
cus is in front of or behind the subject.
The needle swings left when focus is in
front of the subject and right when it is
behind the subject. Adjust focus so the
needle is pointing straight up.

N The display reverses when Y CCW is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL

SETTING > LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING > FOCUS RING ROTATE.

Taking Photographs

95
 Sensitivity
Adjust the camera’s sensitivity to light.
Press the sensitivity dial lock release, ro-
tate the dial to the desired setting, and
press the release again to lock the dial in
place.

Option Description
Sensitivity is automatically adjusted in response to shooting
conditions according to option chosen for A SHOOTING
A (auto)
SETTING > ISO AUTO SETTING. Choose from AUTO1,
AUTO2, and AUTO3.
Rotate the front command dial to choose from AUTO1,
5 AUTO2, AUTO3, and values of from 64 to 51200. This range
C (command) includes “extended” values of 64 to 100, 25600, and 51200.
Taking Photographs

Note that “extended” values may reduce dynamic range or

increase mottling.
Adjust sensitivity manually. Selected value is shown in
125–12800
display.
Adjusting Sensitivity
High values can be used to reduce blur when lighting is poor, while lower
values allow slower shutter speeds or wider apertures in bright light; note,
however, that mottling may appear in pictures taken at high sensitivities.

96
 Sensitivity

AUTO
Use A SHOOTING SETTING  > ISO AUTO SETTING to choose
the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum shut-
ter speed for the A position on the sensitivity dial. Settings for
AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 can be stored separately; the de-
faults are shown below.
Default
Item Options
AUTO1 AUTO2 AUTO3
DEFAULT SENSITIVITY 125–12800 125
MAX. SENSITIVITY 400–12800 800 3200 12800
MIN. SHUTTER SPEED ⁄–30 SEC, AUTO AUTO
The camera automatically chooses a sensitivity between the de-
fault and maximum values; sensitivity is only raised above the
default value if the shutter speed required for optimal exposure
would be slower than the value selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED.
5
N • If the value selected for DEFAULT SENSITIVITY is higher than that

Taking Photographs
selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY, DEFAULT SENSITIVITY will be set to
the value selected for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
• The camera may select shutter speeds slower than MIN. SHUTTER
SPEED if pictures would still be underexposed at the value selected
for MAX. SENSITIVITY.
• If AUTO is selected for MIN. SHUTTER SPEED, the camera will choose
the minimum shutter speed automatically. The minimum shutter
speed is not affected by the option selected for image stabilization.

97
 Metering
Choose how the camera meters exposure.
A SHOOTING SETTING  > PHOTOMETRY offers a choice of the
following metering options:
O The selected option will only take effect if OFF is selected for g FACE/
EYE DETECTION SETTING and SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING in the
G AF/MF SETTING menu.

Mode Description
The camera instantly determines exposure based on an analy-
o sis of composition, color, and brightness distribution. Recom-
MULTI
mended in most situations.
p The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest
CENTER-
weight to the area at the center.
WEIGHTED
5 The camera meters lighting conditions in an area equivalent
v to 2% of the frame. Recommended with backlit subjects and
in other cases in which the background is much brighter or
Taking Photographs

SPOT
darker than the main subject.
Exposure is set to the average for the entire frame. Provides
w consistent exposure across multiple shots with the same light-
AVERAGE ing, and is particularly effective for landscapes and portraits of
subjects dressed in black or white.

N To meter the subject in the selected focus area, choose ON for G AF/
MF SETTING > INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA (P 157).

98
 Exposure Compensation
Adjust exposure.
Rotate the exposure compensation dial.

O • The amount of compensation available varies with the shooting mode.

• Exposure compensation can be previewed in the shooting display,
although the display may not accurately reflect its effects if:
- the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 EV,
- W 200% or X 400% is selected for DYNAMIC RANGE, or
- STRONG or WEAK is selected for D RANGE PRIORITY.
Exposure compensation can still be previewed in the viewfinder or LCD
monitor by pressing the shutter button halfway. In movie mode, the 5
display may not accurately reflect the effects of exposure compensa-
tion during F-log recording or when W 200% or X 400% is selected

Taking Photographs
for DYNAMIC RANGE. An accurate preview can be obtained by select-
ing mode M and adjusting exposure directly.

99
 Exposure Compensation

C (Custom)
When the exposure compensation dial is
rotated to C, exposure compensation can
be adjusted by rotating the front com-
mand dial.

N • The front command dial can be used to set exposure compensation

to values between −5 and +5 EV.
• The function assigned to the front command dial can be selected by
5 pressing the dial (P 296).
Taking Photographs

100
 Focus/Exposure Lock
Focus and exposure lock when the shutter button is pressed
halfway.

1 Position the subject in the focus

frame and press the shutter button
halfway to lock focus and exposure.
Focus and exposure will remain
locked while the shutter button is
pressed halfway (AF/AE lock).

2 Press the button all the way down.

N Focus and exposure lock via the shutter button is only available
when ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AF,
SHUTTER AE.

Taking Photographs

101
 Focus/Exposure Lock

Other Controls
Focus and exposure can also be locked
using the AEL and AFON buttons. At de-
fault settings, you can use the AEL button
to lock exposure without locking focus.
If the AFON button is assigned AF LOCK
ONLY, it can similarly be used to lock fo- AEL button
cus without locking exposure. (exposure lock)
• While the assigned control is pressed,
pressing the shutter button halfway will
not end the lock.
• If AE&AF ON/OFF SWITCH is selected
for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING  > AE/
AF-LOCK MODE, the lock can only be
AFON button
ended by pressing the control a second
5 time.

N • The focus lever (focus stick) can be used to reposition the focus point
Taking Photographs

during exposure lock.

• The AEL and AFON buttons can be assigned other roles using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING. Exposure
and focus lock can also be assigned to other buttons (P 321).

102
 Bracketing
Automatically vary settings over a series of pictures.

1 Rotate the drive dial to BKT.

2 Navigate to DRIVE SETTING  > BKT SETTING in the

A SHOOTING SETTING menu (P 162).
N This feature can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 312).
3 Take photographs. 5
O AE BKT

Taking Photographs
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence and
the order in which the shots are taken. You can also choose the
amount exposure is varied with each shot and whether the shots
are taken one at a time or in a single burst.
N Regardless of the bracketing amount, exposure will not exceed the
limits of the exposure metering system.

W ISO BKT
Select a bracketing amount (±1⁄3, ±2⁄3, or ±1). Each time the shut-
ter is released, the camera will take a picture at the current sen-
sitivity and process it to create two additional copies, one with
sensitivity raised and the other with sensitivity lowered by the
selected amount.

103
 Bracketing

X FILM SIMULATION BKT

Each time the shutter is released, the camera takes one shot and
processes it to create copies with different film simulation set-
tings.

V WHITE BALANCE BKT

Select a bracketing amount (±1, ±2, or ±3). Each time the shutter
is released, the camera takes one shot and processes it to create
three copies: one at the current white balanced setting, one with
fine-tuning increased by the selected amount, and another with
fine-tuning decreased by the selected amount.

Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT

Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes three
shots with different dynamic ranges: 100% for the first, 200% for
the second, and 400% for the third.
5
N While dynamic range bracketing is in effect, sensitivity will be restricted
Taking Photographs

to a minimum of ISO 500; the sensitivity previously in effect is restored

when bracketing ends.

Z FOCUS BKT
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes a series
of photos, varying focus with each shot. The number of shots, the
amount focus changes with each shot, and the interval between
shots can be selected using A SHOOTING SETTING  > DRIVE
SETTING > BKT SETTING > FOCUS BKT.
BKT SETTING
Settings for exposure, sensitivity, film simulation, white balance and focus
bracketing can be adjusted using A SHOOTING SETTING > DRIVE SETTING >
BKT SETTING.

104
 Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)
Capture motion in a series of pictures.

1 Rotate the drive dial to select CH (high-

speed burst) or CL (low-speed burst).

2 Navigate to DRIVE SETTING in the A SHOOTING SETTING

menu and choose a frame advance rate.
N This feature can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 312).
3 Press and hold the shutter button; the camera will continue 5
to take photos while the shutter button is pressed.

Taking Photographs
N Shooting ends when the shutter button is released or the memory
card is full.

105
 Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)

O • Ifmaining
file numbering reaches 9999 before shooting is complete, the re-
pictures will be recorded to a new folder.
• Shooting ends when the memory card is full; the camera will record
all photos shot to that point. Burst shooting may not begin if the
space available on the memory card is insufficient.
• Frame rates may slow as more shots are taken.
• Frame rate varies with the scene, shutter speed, sensitivity, and focus
mode.
• Depending on shooting conditions, frame rates may slow or the flash
may not fire.
• Recording times may increase during burst shooting.
• The choice of burst modes varies with the option selected for
A SHOOTING SETTING > SHUTTER TYPE.
Focus and Exposure
• Select focus mode C to vary focus with shot.
• To vary exposure with each shot, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING > SHUTTER AE.
5
N Exposure and focus tracking performance may vary with such factors
as aperture, sensitivity, and exposure compensation.
Taking Photographs

106
 HDR
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes
three shots, varying exposure each time, and combines
them into a single picture. The resulting photograph pre-
serves details in highlights and shadows.

1 Rotate the drive dial to HDR.

2 Navigate to DRIVE SETTING > HDR MODE in the A SHOOTING

SETTING menu and choose the amount the brightnesses of the 5
exposures vary (P 166).

Taking Photographs
Option Description
Dynamic range is automatically set to a value of from 200%
AUTO
to 800%.
200% Dynamic range is set to 200%.
400% Dynamic range is set to 400%.
800% Dynamic range is set to 800%.
Camera settings are adjusted for maximum variation in dy-
800% +
namic range.

3 Take photographs.
The camera will create a combined image.

107
 HDR

O • Keep the camera steady.

• The desired results may not be achieved in the subject moves or the
composition or lighting changes during shooting.
• The picture will be cropped a very small amount and the resolution
will drop slightly.
• Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a val-
ue according to the scene.
• “Extended” sensitivity values are not supported.
• Depending on the options selected for HDR and sensitivity, pictures
may not be taken at the selected shutter speed.
• The flash does not fire.
N HDR images are indicated by a t icon during playback.

5
Taking Photographs

108
 Advanced Filters
Take photos with filter effects.

1 Rotate the drive dial to ADV..

2 Navigate to DRIVE SETTING > ADV. FILTER SETTING in the

A SHOOTING SETTING menu and choose a filter effect.
N This feature can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 312).
3 Take photographs. 5

Taking Photographs

109
 Advanced Filters

Advanced Filter Options

Choose from the following filters:
Filter Description
G TOY CAMERA Choose for a retro toy camera effect.
The tops and bottoms of pictures are blurred for a
H MINIATURE
diorama effect.
I POP COLOR Create high-contrast images with saturated colors.
J HIGH-KEY Create bright, low-contrast images.
Create uniformly dark tones with few areas of em-
Z LOW-KEY
phasized highlights.
K DYNAMIC TONE Dynamic tone expression is used for a fantasy effect.
Create a look that is evenly soft throughout the
X SOFT FOCUS
whole image.
u PARTIAL COLOR (RED)
v PARTIAL COLOR (ORANGE)
Areas of the image that are the selected color are
w PARTIAL COLOR (YELLOW)
recorded in that color. All other areas of the image
x PARTIAL COLOR (GREEN)
5 are recorded in black-and-white.
y PARTIAL COLOR (BLUE)
z PARTIAL COLOR (PURPLE)
Taking Photographs

N Depending on the subject and camera settings, images may in some

cases be grainy or vary in brightness or hue.

110
 Panoramas
Follow an on-screen guide to create a panorama.

1 Rotate the drive dial to u.

2 To select the size of the angle through which you will pan the
camera while shooting, press the selector left. Highlight a
size and press MENU/OK.

3 Press the selector right to view a choice of pan directions.

Highlight a pan direction and press MENU/OK. 5

Taking Photographs
4 Press the shutter button all the way down to start recording.
There is no need to keep the shutter button pressed during
recording.

5 Pan the camera in the direction

shown by the arrow. Shooting ends
automatically when the camera is Sweep camera along yellow

panned to the end of the guides and line in direction of

ANGLE DIRECTION

the panorama is complete.

111
 For Best Results
• Move the camera slowly in a small circle at a steady speed
• Keep the camera parallel or at right angles to the horizon and be sure to
pan only in the direction shown by the guides
• Try panning at a different speed if the desired results are not achieved
• Prop your elbows against your sides
• Use a tripod
• For best results, use a lens with a focal length of 35 mm or less (50 mm or
less in 35 mm format).

O • If the shutter button is pressed all the way down before the panorama
is complete, shooting will end and no panorama may be recorded.
• The last part of the panorama may not be recorded if shooting ends
before the panorama is complete.
• Panoramas are created from multiple frames, and the camera may in
some cases be unable to stitch the frames together perfectly.
• Panoramas may be blurred if the subject is poorly lit.
• Shooting may be interrupted if the camera is panned too quickly or
5 too slowly. Panning the camera in a direction other than that shown
cancels shooting.
Taking Photographs

• The camera may in some cases record a greater or lesser angle than
selected.
• The desired results may not be achieved with:
- Moving subjects
- Subjects close to the camera
- Unvarying subjects such as the sky or a field of grass
- Subjects that are in constant motion, such as waves and waterfalls
- Subjects that undergo marked changes in brightness
• If ON is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > SHUTTER AE, ex-
posure for the entire panorama is determined by the first frame.

112
 Panoramas

Viewing Panoramas
With the panorama displayed full frame, press the selector down to start
panorama playback. Vertical panoramas will scroll vertically, horizontal pan-
oramas horizontally.

PLAY

STOP PAUSE

• In full-frame playback, you can use the rear command dial to zoom pan-
oramas in or out.
• Panorama playback is controlled using the multi selector.
Full-frame Panorama Panorama
Selector
playback playback playback paused
Up — End playback
Down Start playback Pause playback Resume playback
Choose pan Scroll panorama 5
Left/right View other pictures direction manually

Taking Photographs

113
 Multiple Exposures
Create a photograph that combines multiple exposures.

1 Select ON for A SHOOTING SETTING > MULTI EXPOSURE and

choose a blend mode (P 176).
2 Take the first shot.
3 Press MENU/OK. The first shot will be
shown superimposed on the view
through the lens and you will be
prompted to take the second shot.
5 NEXT
RETRY EXIT
Taking Photographs

N • IfToyou would like to retake the first shot, press the selector left.
• save the first shot and exit without creating a multiple expo-
sure, press DISP/BACK.

4 Take the second shot, using the first

frame as a guide.

EXIT

114
 Multiple Exposures

5 Press MENU/OK.
The combined exposures will be dis-
played as a guide to composing the
next shot.
RETRY EXIT

N • IfToyou would like to retake the second shot, press the selector left.
• end shooting and create a multiple exposure from the shots
taken to this point, press DISP/BACK.

6 Make additional exposures.

Each photograph can contain up to nine exposures.

7 Press DISP/BACK to end shooting.

The camera will create the combined image and multiple ex-
posure shooting will end.

Taking Photographs

115
MEMO

116
The Shooting Menus

117
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust image quality settings for still photography.
To display image quality settings, press IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
IMAGE SIZE
MENU/OK in the photo shooting display and IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING) SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
tab. MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
EXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.

IMAGE SIZE
Choose the size and aspect ratio at which still pictures are recorded.
Option Image size Option Image size
O3:2 7728 × 5152 O4:3 6864 × 5152
O 16 : 9 7728 × 4344 O5:4 6432 × 5152
O1:1 5152 × 5152

Option Image size Option Image size

6 P3:2 5472 × 3648 P4:3 4864 × 3648
P 16 : 9 5472 × 3080 P5:4 4560 × 3648
The Shooting Menus

P1:1 3648 × 3648

Option Image size Option Image size

Q3:2 3888 × 2592 Q4:3 3456 × 2592
Q 16 : 9 3888 × 2184 Q5:4 3264 × 2592
Q1:1 2592 × 2592

The following options are available in SPORTS FINDER MODE

and when 1.29X CROP is selected in burst mode:
Option Image size Option Image size
P3:2 6000 × 4000 P4:3 5328 × 4000
P 16 : 9 6000 × 3376 P5:4 4992 × 4000
P1:1 4000 × 4000

N IMAGE SIZE is not reset when the camera is turned off or another
shooting mode is selected.
118
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

IMAGE QUALITY
Choose a file format and compression ratio.
Option Description
FINE Low compression ratios are used for higher-quality images.
Higher compression ratios are used to increase the number of
NORMAL
images that can be stored.
FINE + RAW Record both RAW and fine-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
NORMAL + RAW Record both RAW and normal-quality JPEG or HEIF images.
RAW Record RAW images only.

The Function Buttons

To toggle RAW image quality on or off for a single shot, assign RAW to a
function button (P 321). Press the button once to select the option in
the right column, again to return to the original setting (left column).

Option currently selected for Option selected by pressing function

IMAGE QUALITY button to which RAW is assigned
FINE FINE + RAW
NORMAL NORMAL + RAW
6
FINE + RAW FINE

The Shooting Menus

NORMAL + RAW NORMAL
RAW FINE

119
 RAW RECORDING
Choose whether to compress RAW images.
Option Description
UNCOMPRESSED RAW images are not compressed.
RAW images are compressed using a reversible algorithm
that reduces file size with no loss of image data. The im-
ages can be viewed in Capture One Express for Fujifilm 1,
Capture One for Fujifilm 1, Capture One 1, RAW FILE
LOSSLESS COMPRESSED CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX 2, FUJIFILM X RAW
STUDIO, or other software that supports “lossless” RAW
compression. Quality is the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
but the resulting files are anywhere from about 30 to 90
percent of their uncompressed size.
RAW images are compressed using a “lossy”, non-reversible
algorithm. Quality is about the same as UNCOMPRESSED,
COMPRESSED
but the resulting files are anywhere from about 25 to 35 per-
cent of their uncompressed size.
1 For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://www.captureone.com/
6 2 For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-powered-
The Shooting Menus

by-silkypix/

120
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

SELECT JPEG/HEIF
Choose whether pictures are recorded in JPEG or HEIF.
Option Description
Pictures are recorded in the widely-supported JPEG for-
JPEG
mat.
Pictures are recorded in HEIF, a format with excellent com-
HEIF
pression but limited options for viewing and sharing.

O • JPEG is automatically selected in place of HEIF during filter-effect,

panorama, multiple-exposure, and HDR photography.
• Selecting HEIF disables CLARITY and sets COLOR SPACE to sRGB.
• HEIF pictures are stored on the memory card as files with the exten-
sion “.HIF”. Before the pictures can be viewed on a computer, the ex-
tension must be changed to “.HEIC”. This occurs automatically when
HEIF pictures are uploaded from the camera to a computer via USB.

The Shooting Menus

121
 FILM SIMULATION
Simulate the effects of different kinds of film, including black-
and-white (with or without color filters). Choose a palette ac-
cording to your subject and creative intent.
Option Description
c PROVIA/STANDARD Ideal for a wide range of subjects.

d Velvia/VIVID Vibrant reproduction, ideal for landscape and nature.

e ASTIA/SOFT Softer color and contrast for a more subdued look.

i CLASSIC CHROME Soft color and enhanced shadow contrast for a calm look.

g PRO Neg. Hi Ideal for portrait with slightly enhanced contrast.

h PRO Neg. Std Ideal for portrait with soft gradations and skin tones.
Enhanced color with hard tonality to increase image
g CLASSIC Neg. depth.
6 Amber tinted highlights and rich shadow tone for printed
n NOSTALGIC Neg. photo look.
The Shooting Menus

Soft color and rich shadow tone suitable for film look
X ETERNA/CINEMA movie.
N ETERNA BLEACH Unique color with low saturation and high contrast. Suit-
BYPASS able for still and movie.
Shoot in Black and White In rich details with sharpness.
Available with yellow (Ye), red (R), and green (G) filters,
which deepen shades of gray corresponding to hues
complementary to the selected color.
a ACROS • d ACROS+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast and
darkens skies.
• c ACROS+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and darkens skies
considerably.
• b ACROS+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones in portrait.

122
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

Option Description
Shoots in black and white. Available with yellow (Ye), red
(R), and green (G) filters, which deepen shades of gray cor-
responding to hues complementary to the selected color.
• e MONOCHROME+Ye FILTER: Slightly enhances contrast
b MONOCHROME and darkens skies.
• d MONOCHROME+R FILTER: Enhances contrast and dark-
ens skies considerably.
• f MONOCHROME+G FILTER: Produces pleasing skin tones
in portrait.
f SEPIA Shoots in sepia tone.

N • Film simulation options can be combined with tone and sharpness

settings.
• Film simulation settings can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 312).
• For more information, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/global/tag/the-world-of-film-simulation/?post_type=xstories

The Shooting Menus

123
 MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Add a reddish or bluish tinge (warm or MONOCHROMATIC COLOR

cool color cast) to the a ACROS and

b MONOCHROME monochrome film
simulations. Color can be adjusted on the
WARM–COOL and G (Green)–M (Magenta)
axes. SET

GRAIN EFFECT
Add a film grain effect.

ROUGHNESS

Option Description
STRONG Choose for rougher grains.
WEAK Choose for smoother grains.
OFF Turn the effect off.

SIZE
6
Option Description
The Shooting Menus

LARGE Choose for coarser grains.

SMALL Choose for finer grains.

124
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

COLOR CHROME EFFECT

Increase the range of tones available for rendering colors that
tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yellows, and greens.
Option Description
STRONG Choose for a strong effect.
WEAK Choose for a weak effect.
OFF Turn the effect off.

COLOR CHROME FX BLUE

Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues.
Option Description
STRONG Choose for a strong effect.
WEAK Choose for a weak effect.
OFF Turn the effect off.

SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT

Smooth complexions.
6
Option Description

The Shooting Menus

STRONG Choose for a strong effect.
WEAK Choose for a weak effect.
OFF Turn the effect off.

125
 WHITE BALANCE
For natural colors, choose a white balance option that matches
the light source.
Option Description
WA WHITE White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for whiter
PRIORITY whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
AUTO White balance is adjusted automatically.
AA AMBIENCE White balance is adjusted automatically. Choose for warmer
PRIORITY whites in scenes lit by incandescent bulbs.
k CUSTOM 1
l CUSTOM 2 Measure a value for white balance.
m CUSTOM 3
k COLOR
Choose a color temperature.
TEMPERATURE
i DAYLIGHT For subjects in direct sunlight.
j SHADE For subjects in the shade.
k FLUORESCENT
Use under “daylight” fluorescent lights.
LIGHT-1
6
l FLUORESCENT
Use under “warm white” fluorescent lights.
LIGHT-2
The Shooting Menus

m FLUORESCENT
Use under “cool white” fluorescent lights.
LIGHT-3
n INCANDESCENTUse under incandescent lighting.
Reduces the blue cast typically associated with underwater
g UNDERWATER
lighting.

N • In conditions in which AUTO fails to produce the desired results—for

example, under certain types of lighting or in close-ups of portrait
subjects—use custom white balance or choose a white balance op-
tion suited to the light source.
• White balance is adjusted for flash lighting only in AUTO, WA WHITE
PRIORITY, AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY, and g modes. Turn the
flash off using other white balance options.
• White balance options can also be accessed via shortcuts (P 312).
126
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

Fine-Tuning White Balance

Pressing MENU/OK after selecting a white WB SHIFT

balance option displays the dialog shown

at right; use the selector to fine-tune white
balance.

SET

N • To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after se-

lecting a white balance option.
• You cannot tilt the focus stick diagonally when fine-tuning white bal-
ance.

The Shooting Menus

127
 Custom White Balance
Choose k, l, or m to adjust white CUSTOM 1

balance for unusual lighting conditions

using a white object as a reference (col-
ored objects can also be used to lend
photos a color cast). A white balance tar- SHUTTER : NEW WB

get will be displayed; position and size SHIFT NOT CHANGE

the target so that it is filled by the reference object and press the
shutter button all the way down to measure white balance (to
select the most recent custom value and exit without measuring
white balance, press DISP/BACK, or press MENU/OK to select the most
recent value and display the fine-tuning dialog).
• If “COMPLETED !” is displayed, press MENU/OK COMPLETED !

to set white balance to the measured

value.
• If “UNDER” is displayed, raise exposure
compensation and try again.
• If “OVER” is displayed, lower exposure com- SET CANCEL

6 pensation and try again.

The Shooting Menus

k: Color Temperature
Adjust white balance to match the color temperature of the light
source.
N Color temperature can be adjusted to make pictures “warmer” or “cold-
er” or deliberately produce colors that differ radically from those in real
life.

128
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

1 Select k in the white balance menu. WHITE BALANCE

The option currently selected for col-

or temperature will be displayed. COLOR TEMPERATURE
R:0 B:0

SET SHIFT

2 Edit the color temperature using the COLOR TEMPERATURE

selector and press MENU/OK.

A fine-tuning dialog will be dis-
played.

SET SHIFT

N • You can also adjust color temperature in increments of 10 K by

rotating the rear command dial.
• Choose from values of from 2500 to 10000 K.
• To exit without fine-tuning white balance, press DISP/BACK after
choosing a color temperature.

3 Press the selector up, down, left, or right to highlight a fine-tun-

6
ing amount.

The Shooting Menus

4 Press MENU/OK.
The changes will be applied. The se-
lected color temperature will appear
in the display.

Color Temperature
Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, ex-
pressed in Kelvin (K). Light sources with a color temperature close to that of
direct sunlight appear white; light sources with a lower color temperature
have a yellow or red cast, while those with a higher color temperature are
tinged with blue.

129
 DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjust dynamic range. Wide dynamic ranges reduce loss of de-
tail in highlights for more natural results with high-contrast or
backlit scenes.
Option Description
V 100% Choose for increased contrast.
AUTO
W 200%
X 400% Reduce loss of detail in highlights.

O Mottling may appear in pictures taken at higher values. Choose a value

according to the scene.
N • If AUTO is selected, the camera will automatically choose either
V 100% or W 200% according to the subject and shooting con-
ditions. Shutter speed and aperture will be displayed when the shut-
ter button is pressed halfway.
• W 200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 250 to ISO 12800,
X 400% at sensitivities of from ISO 500 to 12800.

D RANGE PRIORITY
6 Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for natural-look-
ing results when photographing high-contrast scenes.
The Shooting Menus

Option Description
Contrast is adjusted automatically in response to lighting con-
AUTO
ditions.
Adjust dynamic range by a large amount for very high-contrast
STRONG
scenes.
Adjust dynamic range by a smaller amount for moderately
WEAK
high-contrast scenes.
OFF Contrast reduction off.
N • WEAK is available at sensitivities of from ISO  250 to ISO  12800,
STRONG at sensitivities of from ISO 500 to 12800.
• When an option other than OFF is selected, TONE CURVE, and
DYNAMIC RANGE will be adjusted automatically; if you wish to ad-
just these settings manually, choose OFF.

130
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

TONE CURVE
With reference to a tone curve, adjust the TONE CURVE
HIGHLIGHTS SHADOWS
appearance of highlights or shadows,
making them harsher or softer. Choose
higher values to make shadows and
highlights harsher, lower values to make
them softer. SET CANCEL

Option Description
HIGHLIGHTS -2 to +4
SHADOWS -2 to +4

COLOR
Adjust color density.
Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4

SHARPNESS
Sharpen or soften outlines. 6

The Shooting Menus

Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4

131
 HIGH ISO NR
Reduce noise in pictures taken at high sensitivities. Choose high-
er values to reduce noise and smooth outlines, lower values to
leave outlines visible.
Options
−4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4

CLARITY
Increase definition while altering tones in highlights and shad-
ows as little as possible. Choose higher values for increased defi-
nition, lower values for a softer effect.
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5

O The additional processing required at settings other than 0 increases

the time need to save each shot.

LONG EXPOSURE NR
6 Select ON to reduce mottling in long time-exposures.
The Shooting Menus

Options
ON OFF

O The additional processing required when ON is selected increases save

times.

132
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER

Select ON to improve definition by adjusting for diffraction and
the slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
Options
ON OFF

COLOR SPACE
Choose the gamut of colors available for color reproduction.
Option Description
sRGB Recommended in most situations.
Adobe RGB For commercial printing.

PIXEL MAPPING
Use this option if you notice bright spots in your pictures.

1 Press MENU/OK in the shooting display and select the H IMAGE

QUALITY SETTING tab.

2 Highlight PIXEL MAPPING and press MENU/OK to perform pix- 6

el mapping.

The Shooting Menus

O • Results are not guaranteed.
• Be sure the battery is fully charged before beginning pixel mapping.
• Pixel mapping is not available when the camera temperature is ele-
vated.
• Processing may take a few seconds.

133
 x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING
Recall settings saved to custom settings banks 1 through
7 (CUSTOM 1 through CUSTOM 7) using x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.
Banks
NOTHING SELECTED CUSTOM 1 CUSTOM 2 CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4 CUSTOM 5 CUSTOM 6 CUSTOM 7

N IfSELECTED.
you would prefer not to recall saved settings, select NOTHING

x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

Adjust settings as desired and save them to a custom settings
bank. Saved settings can be recalled using H IMAGE QUALITY
SETTING > x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING.
N Photo menu settings can be adjusted when the STILL/MOVIE mode dial
is rotated to STILL.

Saving Custom Settings

6
Create a new custom settings bank.
The Shooting Menus

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.

2 Highlight a destination bank for EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

CREATE NEW
the new settings (CREATE NEW C1 CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
through C7) and press MENU/OK. CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
A confirmation dialog will be dis- CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
played.

3 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. CREATE NEW

CUSTOM 1
Current camera settings will be saved CREATE NEW OK?

to the selected bank.

OK
CANCEL

134
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

Editing Custom Settings

Edit existing custom settings banks.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.

2 Highlight the desired custom set- EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

CUSTOM 1
tings bank and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

CUSTOM 1
3 Highlight EDIT/CHECK and press
MENU/OK. EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

6
CUSTOM 1 EDIT/CHECK
4

The Shooting Menus

The camera will display a list of shoot- IMAGE SIZE
ing menu items; highlight an item you IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
wish to edit and press MENU/OK. SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
Adjust the selected item as desired. MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
SAVE EXIT

5 Press MENU/OK to save the changes and return to the shooting

menu list.
Adjust additional items as desired.

135
 N If DISABLE is selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > AUTO
UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the photo menu or for B MOVIE
SETTING  > FAUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING in the mov-
ie menu, red dots will appear next to the edited items but the
changes will not be saved automatically.
• To save the changes for selected items, highlight the items in the
list and press Q.
• To save changes for all items, return to Step 3 and select SAVE THE
CHANGES. To cancel all changes and restore the previous settings,
select RESET THE CHANGES.
• If you copy an item marked by a red dot, the item will be copied with
the changes intact.

6
The Shooting Menus

136
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

Copying Custom Settings

Copy custom settings from one bank to another, overwriting the
settings in the destination bank. If the source bank has been re-
named, the name will also be copied to the destination bank.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.

2 Highlight the source bank and press EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

CUSTOM 1
MENU/OK. CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

3 Highlight COPY and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 1

EDIT/CHECK
SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
6
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

The Shooting Menus

4 Highlight the destination bank (C1 COPY TO
CUSTOM 1
through C7) and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
A confirmation dialog will be dis- CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
played. CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

N Any changes to custom settings in the

destination bank will be overwritten.

5 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK. COPY

CUSTOM 1
The selected settings will be copied CUSTOM 2
COPY OK?
to the destination bank, overwriting
any existing settings. OK
CANCEL

137
 Deleting Custom Settings
Delete settings from selected custom settings banks.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.

2 Highlight the desired custom set- EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

CUSTOM 1
tings bank and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

3 Highlight ERASE and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 1

A confirmation dialog will be dis- EDIT/CHECK

SAVE THE CHANGES
played. RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

6
4
The Shooting Menus

ERASE
Highlight OK and press MENU/OK.
CUSTOM 1
Any custom settings saved to the se- ERASE OK?

lected bank will be deleted.

OK
CANCEL

138
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

Renaming Custom Settings Banks

Rename selected custom settings banks.

1 Select H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

SETTING in the shooting menu and press MENU/OK.
N To save settings for movie recording, navigate to B MOVIE
SETTING in the movie menus and select F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM
SETTING.

2 Highlight the desired custom set- EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

CUSTOM 1
tings bank and press MENU/OK. CUSTOM 2
CUSTOM 3
CUSTOM 4
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW
CREATE NEW

3 Highlight EDIT CUSTOM NAME and CUSTOM 1

press MENU/OK. EDIT/CHECK

SAVE THE CHANGES
RESET THE CHANGES
COPY
ERASE
EDIT CUSTOM NAME

6
4

The Shooting Menus

Enter a new name for the custom settings bank and select
SET.
The selected bank will be renamed.

AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING

Choose whether changes to saved custom settings apply auto-
matically.
Option Description
Changes to custom settings banks CUSTOM 1 through
ENABLE
CUSTOM 7 apply automatically.
Changes do not apply automatically. Any changes to custom
DISABLE
settings must be applied manually (P 135).

139
 xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING
Adjust settings for lenses attached via a mount adapter. The
camera can store settings for multiple lenses (LENS  1 through
LENS 6).
N • DISTORTION CORRECTION, COLOR SHADING CORRECTION, and
PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION are available with lens-
es connected via an M mount adapter.
• Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode
(P 204).

FOCAL LENGTH SETTING

Enter the lens’s true focal length. LENS 5

INPUT FOCAL LENGTH

SET CANCEL

DISTORTION CORRECTION
6 Choose from STRONG, MEDIUM, or LENS5 DISTORTION CORRECTION
BARREL STRONG
WEAK options to correct BARREL or BARREL MEDIUM
The Shooting Menus

BARREL WEAK
PINCUSHION distortion. OFF
PINCUSHION WEAK
PINCUSHION MEDIUM
PINCUSHION STRONG

140
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

COLOR SHADING CORRECTION

Color (shading) variations between the
center and edges of the frame can be ad-
justed separately for each corner.
To use color shading correction, follow the
steps below. NEXT SET

1 Rotate the rear command dial to choose a corner. The select-

ed corner is indicated by a triangle.

2 Use the selector to adjust shading until there is no visible dif-

ference in color between the selected corner and the center
of the image.
• Press the selector left or right to adjust colors on the cyan–
red axis.
• Press the selector up or down to adjust colors on the blue–
yellow axis.
N To determine the amount required, adjust color shading correction
while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.
6

The Shooting Menus

141
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Still Photography)

PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION

Choose from values between –5 and
+5. Choosing positive values increases
peripheral illumination, while choosing
negative values reduces peripheral il-
lumination. Positive values are recom- SET CANCEL

mended for vintage lenses, negative val-

ues to create the effect of images taken with an antique lens or a
pinhole camera.
N To determine the amount required, adjust peripheral illumination cor-
rection while taking photos of blue sky or a sheet of gray paper.

EDIT LENS NAME

Change the lens name.

6
The Shooting Menus

142
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust focus settings for still photography.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK AF/MF SETTING
FOCUS AREA
in the photo shooting display and select AF MODE
AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
the G (AF/MF SETTING) tab. STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
AF POINT DISPLAY
xF WRAP FOCUS POINT
NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS
PRE-AF
EXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.

FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 87).

AF MODE
Choose the AF mode for focus modes S and C (P 85).

The Shooting Menus

143
 AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
Select focus-tracking options for focus AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS
SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
mode C. Choose from Sets 1–5 according
to your subject or select Set 6 for custom
focus-tracking options. TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA SWITCHING AUTO
OK

Option Description
A standard tracking option that works well with
SET 1 MULTI PURPOSE
the typical range of moving subjects.
The focus system attempts to track the chosen
SET 2 IGNORE OBSTACLES & subject. Choose with subjects that are hard to
CONTINUE TO TRACK SUBJECT keep in the focus area or if other objects are likely
to enter the focus area with the subject.
The focus system attempts to compensate for
SET 3 FOR ACCELERATING/
subject acceleration or deceleration. Choose for
DECELERATING SUBJECT
subjects prone to rapid changes in velocity.
The focus system attempts to focus quickly on
6 SET 4 FOR SUDDENLY APPEARING subjects entering the focus area. Choose for sub-
SUBJECT jects that appear abruptly or when rapidly switch-
The Shooting Menus

ing subjects.
Choose for hard-to-track subjects prone not only
SET 5 FOR ERRATICALLY MOVING
to sudden changes in velocity but also to large
& ACCEL./DECEL. SUBJECT
movements front to back and left to right.
Adjust TRACKING SENSITIVITY, SPEED
TRACKING SENSITIVITY, and ZONE AREA
SET 6 CUSTOM
SWITCHING to suit your preferences based on
the values for Sets 1–5 (P 145, 147).

144
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

Focus Tracking Options

The individual parameters that are part of a focus tracking set are
described below.
TRACKING SENSITIVITY
This parameter determines how long the TRACKING SENSITIVITY

camera waits to switch focus when an

QUICK LOCKED ON
object enters the focus area behind or in
front of the current subject. The higher
SETS THE TRACKING
the value, the longer the camera will wait. SENSITIVITY ON THE SUBJECT

ADJUST SWITCH

Options
0 1 2 3 4

O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
• The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY 6
This parameter determines how sensi- SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY

The Shooting Menus

tive the tracking system is to changes in
STEADY ACCEL./DECEL.
subject velocity. The higher the value,
the greater the precision with which the
SETS THE SPEED TRACKING
system attempts to respond to sudden SENSITIVITY FOR MOVING SUBJECT

movement. ADJUST SWITCH

Options
0 1 2

O The higher the value, the more difficulty the camera will have focusing
in situations in which autofocus does not perform well, such as when
the subject is highly reflective or low in contrast.

145
 ZONE AREA SWITCHING
This parameter determines the focus ZONE AREA SWITCHING

area given priority in zone AF.

CENTER AUTO FRONT

SETS THE SWITCHING SENSITIVITY

OF FOCUS FRAME IN ZONE AREA

ADJUST SWITCH

Option Description
FRONT Zone AF assigns priority to the subjects closest to the camera.
The camera locks focus on the subject at the center of the zone
AUTO
and then switches focus areas as necessary to track it.
CENTER Zone AF assigns priority to subjects in the center of the zone.

O This option takes effect only when y ZONE is selected for AF mode.

Set Values
Parameter values for the different sets are listed below.
TRACKING SPEED TRACKING ZONE AREA
6 SENSITIVITY SENSITIVITY SWITCHING
SET 1 2 0 AUTO
The Shooting Menus

SET 2 3 0 CENTER
SET 3 2 2 AUTO
SET 4 0 1 FRONT
SET 5 3 2 AUTO

146
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

Custom Focus Tracking Options

Follow the steps below to adjust settings for Set 6.

1 Select AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS  > AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS

SET 6 CUSTOM
SET 6 CUSTOM.

TRACKING SENSITIVITY
SPEED TRACKING SENSITIVITY
ZONE AREA SWITCHING AUTO
ADJUST SET DETAIL RESET

2 Press the selector up or down to highlight items and rotate

the front command dial to change. To reset settings to their
original values, press b.

3 Press DISP/BACK when settings are complete.

The Shooting Menus

147
 STORE AF MODE BY ORIENTATION
Choose whether the AF mode used when the camera is in por-
trait orientation is stored separately from that used when the
camera is in landscape orientation.
Option Description
OFF The same settings are used in both orientations.
FOCUS AREA ONLY The focus area for each orientation can be selected separately.
ON The focus mode and focus area can be selected separately.

AF POINT DISPLAY yz
Choose whether individual focus frames are displayed when
ZONE or WIDE/TRACKING is selected for G AF/MF SETTING  >
AF MODE.
Options
ON OFF

xF WRAP FOCUS POINT

6 Choose whether focus-area selection is bounded by the borders
of the display or “wraps around” from one edge of the display to
The Shooting Menus

another.
Option Description
Focus-area selection “wraps around” from one edge of the display
ENABLE
to another.
DISABLE Focus-area selection is bounded by the borders of the display.

148
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

NUMBER OF FOCUS POINTS

Choose the number of focus points available for focus-point se-
lection in manual focus mode or when SINGLE POINT is selected
for AF MODE.
Option Description
Choose from 117 focus points arranged in a 9- by 13-point
117 POINTS (9 × 13)
grid.
Choose from 425 focus points arranged in a 17- by 25-point
425 POINTS (17 × 25)
grid.

PRE-AF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to adjust focus even
when the shutter button is not pressed halfway. The camera
adjusts focus continuously, allowing it to focus faster when the
shutter button is pressed halfway. Choosing this option helps
prevent missed shots.
Options
ON OFF 6
O Choosing ON increases the drain on the battery.

The Shooting Menus

149
 xF AF ILLUMINATOR
If ON is selected, the AF-assist illuminator will light to assist
autofocus.
Options
ON OFF

O • The camera may be unable to focus using the AF-assist illuminator

in some cases.
• If the camera is unable to focus, try increasing the distance to the
subject.
• Avoid shining the AF-assist illuminator directly into your subject’s
eyes.
N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 207).

6
The Shooting Menus

150
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING

If the camera detects human faces, it will
assign them priority over the background
and adjust settings appropriately for por-
traits when setting focus and exposure.
You can also choose whether the camera
focuses on the left or right eye when face
detection is on.
Option Description
Adjust settings for Intelligent Face Detection. You can also adjust
eye detection settings.
• g EYE OFF: Intelligent Face Detection only.
• u EYE AUTO: The camera automatically chooses which eye
to focus on when a face is detected.
FACE DETECTION
ON • w RIGHT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential-
ly on the right eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
Detection.
• v LEFT EYE PRIORITY: The camera focuses preferential-
ly on the left eye of subjects detected using Intelligent Face
6
Detection.
OFF Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off.

The Shooting Menus

O • If the subject moves as the shutter button is pressed, the face may
not be in the area indicated by the green border when the picture
is taken.
• In some modes, the camera may set exposure for the frame as a
whole rather than the portrait subject.
• Enabling Intelligent Face Detection via FACE DETECTION ON auto-
matically selects OFF for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING.

151
 N • A single face detected in or near the focus area will be marked with
a white frame.
• If multiple faces are detected in the focus area, the camera will select
one automatically.
• You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to repo-
sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
• When DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION or EDIT FOCUS AREA is cho-
sen for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING  > FOCUS LEVER SETTING >
TILT o, you can also switch subjects using the focus stick (focus lever)
or (during viewfinder photography) touch controls (P 26).
• When the camera is focused on an eye, you can switch from one
eye to the other using a function button to which RIGHT/LEFT EYE
SWITCH has been assigned.
• If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no face is seen.
• Depending on shooting conditions, face selection may be suspend-
ed at the close of burst shooting.
• Faces can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal ori-
6 entation.
• If the camera is unable to detect the subject’s eyes because they are
The Shooting Menus

hidden by hair, glasses, or other objects, the camera will instead focus
on faces.
• Face/eye detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts
(P 312).

152
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING

Choose whether the camera prioritizes subjects of a selected
type, such as animals or vehicles, when setting focus.
Option Description
Select one of the subject types listed below to enable subject
detection.
• E ANIMAL: The camera detects and tracks focus on dogs and
cats.
• F BIRD: The camera detects and tracks focus on birds.
• G AUTOMOBILE: The camera detects and tracks focus on
SUBJECT the body or front ends of cars, primarily those of types used
DETECTION ON for motor sports.
• H MOTORCYCLE&BIKE: The camera detects and tracks
focus on the riders of motorcycles and bicycles.
• I AIRPLANE: The camera detects and tracks focus on the
cockpits, noses, or bodies of airplanes.
• J TRAIN: The camera detects and tracks focus on the driver
compartments or front ends of trains.
OFF Subject detection off.
6
O Enabling subject detection via SUBJECT DETECTION ON automatical-
ly selects OFF for g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING.

The Shooting Menus

153
 N • A single subject of the chosen type detected in or near the focus area
will be marked with a white frame.
• If multiple subjects are detected in the focus area, the camera will
select one automatically.
• You can choose a different subject by tapping the display to repo-
sition the focus area. The focus stick (focus lever) can also be used if
z WIDE is selected for AF MODE.
• When DIRECT AF POINT SELECTION or EDIT FOCUS AREA is cho-
sen for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING  > FOCUS LEVER SETTING >
TILT o, you can also switch subjects using the focus stick (focus lever)
or (during viewfinder photography) touch controls (P 26).
• If the selected subject leaves the frame, the camera will wait a set
time for its return and consequently the white frame may sometimes
appear in locations where no subject of the chosen type is seen.
• Depending on shooting conditions, subject detection may be sus-
pended at the close of burst shooting.
• Subjects can be detected with the camera in vertical or horizontal
orientation.
• Subject detection options can also be accessed via shortcuts
(P 312).
6
The Shooting Menus

154
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

AF+MF
If ON is selected and focus has been locked (whether by pressing
the shutter button halfway or by other means), focus lock can be
ended and focus adjusted manually by rotating the focus ring.
Options
ON OFF

O • Lenses with a focus distance indicator must be set to manual focus

mode (MF) before this option can be used. Selecting MF disables the
focus distance indicator.
• If the lens is equipped with a focus distance indicator, set the focus
ring to the center, as the camera may fail to focus if the ring is set to
infinity or the minimum focus distance.

N • The previously-selected focus mode will be restored if no operations

are performed for a set period after the focus ring is rotated.
• DIGITAL SPLIT IMAGE and DIGITAL MICROPRISM focus assist op-
tions selected via MF ASSIST cannot be used.

AF + MF Focus Zoom
Selecting ON for G AF/MF SETTING  > FOCUS CHECK when SINGLE 6
POINT is chosen for AF MODE lets you zoom in on the current focus area

The Shooting Menus

by rotating the focus ring. The zoom ratio can be selected using the rear
command dial.

155
 MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 94).
Option Description
Displays a black-and-white (MONOCHROME) or color (COLOR)
DIGITAL SPLIT split image in the center of the frame. Frame the subject in the
IMAGE split-image area and rotate the focus ring until the four parts of
the split image are correctly aligned.
A grid pattern that emphasizes blur is displayed when the subject
DIGITAL
is out of focus, disappearing to be replaced by a sharp image when
MICROPRISM
the subject is in focus.
FOCUS PEAK The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a color and
HIGHLIGHT peaking level.
Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking, digital split image, and
OFF
digital microprism are not available).

FOCUS CHECK
If ON is selected, the display will automatically zoom in on the
selected focus area when the focus ring is rotated in manual fo-
6 cus mode.
The Shooting Menus

Options
ON OFF

N • Pressing the center of the rear command dial cancels focus zoom.
• The zoom position is centered on the current focus area and changes
when the focus area is changed.

156
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

INTERLOCK SPOT AE & FOCUS AREA

Choose ON to meter the current focus frame when SPOT or
MULTI metering is selected.
Options
ON OFF

xF INSTANT AF SETTING
Choose whether the camera focuses using single AF (AF-S) or
continuous AF (AF-C) when a button to which focus lock or
AF-ON is assigned is pressed in manual focus mode.
Option Description
AF-S The camera focuses when the button is pressed.
AF-C The camera focuses while the button is pressed.

N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 208).
xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
Choose the basis for the depth-of-field scale. 6
Option Description

The Shooting Menus

Provides a precision reference for use when assessing depth of field
PIXEL BASIS for pictures that will be viewed at high resolutions on computers
or other electronic displays.
Provides a practical reference for use when assessing depth of field
FILM FORMAT
for pictures that will be viewed at lower resolutions, for example
BASIS
as prints.

N Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 209).

157
 RELEASE/FOCUS PRIORITY
Choose how the camera focuses in focus mode AF-S or AF-C.
Option Description
Shutter response is prioritized over focus. Pictures can be taken
RELEASE
when the camera is not in focus.
Focus is prioritized over shutter response. Pictures can be only
FOCUS
taken when the camera is in focus.

O Regardless of the option selected, pictures can still be taken when the
camera is not in focus if ON is selected for AF+MF.

6
The Shooting Menus

158
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

xF AF RANGE LIMITER
Limit the range of available focus distances for increased focus
speed.
Option Description
OFF Focus limiter disabled.
Limit focus to a range of distances defined by a minimum and
maximum.
CUSTOM • OK: Limit focus to the selected range.
• SET: Choose two objects and limit focus to the distance be-
tween them.
PRESET1
Limit focus to a preset range.
PRESET2

O • Choosing a focus range that includes distances shorter than the min-
imum focus distance of the lens disables the focus limiter.
• The values listed and displayed for the focus limiter may differ from
the actual focus distance.
• Focus range can be set independently on lenses equipped with fo-
cus range selectors. Be sure that the option selected in the camera
menus overlaps with that chosen with the lens. 6
N • The following additional operations can be performed when CUSTOM

The Shooting Menus

is selected:
- You can tap objects in the touch screen display to choose the focus
range.
- Instead of tapping an object in the display, you set the maximum
focus distance to infinity by rotating the focus ring.
• Any changes made using this item also apply in movie mode (P 209).

159
 TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode Description
Tap your subject in the display to focus and release the shutter.
TOUCH In burst mode, pictures will be taken while you keep your finger
SHOOTING on the display.

• In focus mode S (AF-S), the camera focuses when you tap your
subject in the display. Focus locks at the current distance until
AF you tap the AF OFF icon.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera initiates focus when you
tap your subject display. The camera will continue to adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject until you tap
the AF OFF icon.
AF OFF
• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to focus
on the selected subject using autofocus.

Tap to select a point for focus or zoom. The focus frame will
AREA move to the selected point.
6
OFF Touch screen mode off.
The Shooting Menus

N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.

• To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-
tor, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING  > TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.

160
 AF/MF SETTING (Still Photography)

Touch Controls for Focus Zoom

Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs the
operations below.

Mode Still Photography

TOUCH SHOOTING AF-S/MF: Take a picture
AF-S: AF
AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S: AF
AREA
MF: Instant AF
OFF AF-S/MF: OFF
Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,
whether during still photography or movie re- 6
cording and regardless of the option selected

The Shooting Menus

for touch screen mode.

161
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust shooting options for still photography.
To display shooting settings, press MENU/OK SHOOTING SETTING
DRIVE SETTING
in the photo shooting display and select SPORTS FINDER MODE
PRE-SHOT
the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab. SELF-TIMER
SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING

N The options available vary with the shoot- SELF-TIMER LAMP

PHOTOMETRY
ing mode selected. SHUTTER TYPE
EXIT

DRIVE SETTING
Adjust settings for the various drive modes.

BKT SETTING
Choose the bracketing type and adjust bracketing options for
the BKT drive mode.
BKT SELECT
The following options are available when BKT is selected for drive
mode.
6 Bracketing type
O AE BKT V WHITE BALANCE BKT
The Shooting Menus

W ISO BKT Y DYNAMIC RANGE BKT

X FILM SIMULATION BKT Z FOCUS BKT

162
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

AE BKT
The following options are available when O AE BKT is chosen
for BKT SELECT.
Option Description
Choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence
and the amount exposure is varied with each shot.
FRAMES/STEP SETTING • FRAMES: Choose the number of shots in the bracket-
ing sequence.
• STEP: Choose the amount exposure is varied with
each shot.
• 1 FRAME: The shots in the bracketing sequence are
taken one at a time.
1 FRAME/CONTINUOUS
• CONTINUOUS: The shots in the bracketing sequence are
taken in a single burst.
SEQUENCE SETTING Choose the order in which the shots are taken.
ISO BKT
The following options are available when W ISO BKT is chosen
for BKT SELECT.
Options 6
±1⁄3 ±2⁄3 ±1

The Shooting Menus

FILM SIMULATION BKT
Choose the three film simulation types used for film simulation
bracketing (P 122).
WHITE BALANCE BKT
The following options are available when V WHITE BALANCE
BKT is chosen for BKT SELECT.
Options
±1 ±2 ±3

163
 FOCUS BKT SETTING
Choose from AUTO and MANUAL focus bracketing modes.
• MANUAL: In MANUAL mode, you choose the following.
Option Description
FRAMES Choose the number of shots.
STEP Choose the amount focus changes with each shot.
INTERVAL Choose the interval between shots.
Focus and FRAMES/STEP
The relation between focus and the options chosen for FRAMES and
STEP is shown in the illustration.

Step

Frames 1 2 3 4 5

Starting focus position

6
• Focus proceeds from the starting position toward infinity.
• Small STEP values translate to small changes in focus, larger values to larger
The Shooting Menus

changes.
• Regardless of the option chosen for FRAMES, shooting ends when focus
reaches infinity.

164
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

• AUTO: In AUTO mode, the camera calculates FRAMES and STEP

automatically.
1 Navigate to A SHOOTING SETTING  > DRIVE SETTING  >
BKT SETTING in the photo menus, highlight FOCUS BKT,
and press MENU/OK.

2 Select AUTO and choose an INTERVAL.

The view through the lens will be displayed.

3 Focus on the nearest end of the FOCUS BKT SETTING

SET POINT A
CONTROL THE FOCUS RING
subject and press MENU/OK.
The selected focus distance ap-
pears as A on the focus distance SET POINT B SET

indicator.

N The same focus range can be chosen by focusing on the farthest

end of the subject first.

4 Focus on the farthest end of the FOCUS BKT SETTING

SET POINT B
CONTROL THE FOCUS RING
6
subject and press DISP/BACK.
The selected focus distance (B) and

The Shooting Menus

focus range (A to B) appear on the SET POINT A SET

focus distance indicator.

N Instead of pressing the DISP/BACK button, you can press MENU/OK

and select A again.

5 Take photographs.
The camera will calculate values for
FRAMES and STEP automatically.
The number of frames will appear NO

in the display.

165
 CH HIGH SPEED BURST
Select the frame rate used when the drive dial is rotated to
CH  (continuous high speed). The display frame rate when the
electronic shutter is used is 40 fps, or 60 fps in 1.29× crop mode.
Options
20fps(1.29X CROP) R 1 13fps(1.29X CROP) R 1 10fps(1.29X CROP) R 1
15fps 2 10fps 3
1 Available with electronic shutter only.
2 13 fps with electronic shutter.
3 8.9 fps with electronic shutter.

CL LOW SPEED BURST

Select the frame rate used when the drive dial is rotated to
CL (continuous low speed).
Options
7.0fps * 5.0fps 3.0fps
* 6.7 fps with electronic shutter.

6 HDR MODE
Each time the shutter button is pressed, the camera takes three
The Shooting Menus

shots, varying exposure each time, and combines them into a

single picture. The resulting photograph preserves details in
highlights and shadows (P 107).

ADV. FILTER SETTING

Choose the filter used when the drive dial is rotated to ADV. (P 110).

166
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

SPORTS FINDER MODE

Take pictures using the crop in the center
of the display. Choose this option for pic-
tures of athletes, birds, and other moving
subjects.

Option Description
Pictures are taken using a 1.29× crop, reducing the picture angle by an
ON amount equivalent to increasing lens focal length by 1.29×; the crop
is shown by a frame in the display.
OFF The 1.29× crop is disabled.

N • The H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE item in the shoot-

ing menu is fixed at P.
• The sports finder is not available in modes that offer an electronic
shutter.

The Shooting Menus

167
 PRE-SHOT sJ
To reduce the lag between your pressing the shutter button all the
way down and the resulting picture being recorded to the memory
card, the camera starts shooting with the electronic shutter when the
shutter button is pressed halfway and saves a series shots starting
just before the shutter button is pressed the rest of the way down.
Options
ON OFF

N • Pre-shot photography is available only when s ELECTRONIC

SHUTTER is selected in CH (high speed burst) drive mode (P 170).
• Flash photography is disabled.
SELF-TIMER
Choose a shutter release delay.
Option Description
The shutter is released two seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
Use to reduce blur caused by the camera moving when the shutter
R 2 SEC
6 button is pressed. The self-timer lamp blinks as the timer counts
down.
The Shooting Menus

The shutter is released ten seconds after the shutter button is pressed.
S 10 SEC Use for photographs in which you wish to appear yourself. The
self-timer lamp blinks immediately before the picture is taken.
OFF Self-timer off.
If an option other than OFF is selected, the
timer will start when the shutter button is 9
pressed all the way down. The display shows
the number of seconds remaining until the
shutter is released. To stop the timer before
the picture is taken, press DISP/BACK.
O • Stand behind the camera when using the shutter button. Standing in
front of the lens can interfere with focus and exposure.
• The self-timer turns off automatically when the camera is turned off.
168
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

SAVE SELF-TIMER SETTING

If ON is selected, the chosen self-timer setting will remain in ef-
fect after a picture is taken or the camera is turned off.
Options
ON OFF

SELF-TIMER LAMP
If ON is selected, the self-timer lamp will light during self-timer
photography. Select OFF when shooting night scenes or in other
situations in which you would prefer that the lamp remain unlit.
Options
ON OFF

PHOTOMETRY
Choose how the camera meters exposure (P 98).

The Shooting Menus

169
 SHUTTER TYPE
Choose the shutter type. Choose the electronic shutter to mute
the shutter sound.
Option Description
t MECHANICAL SHUTTER Take pictures with the mechanical shutter.
s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER Take pictures with the electronic shutter.
t E-FRONT CURTAIN
Take pictures with the electronic front curtain shutter.
SHUTTER
u MECHANICAL + The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic
ELECTRONIC shutter according to shooting conditions.
v E-FRONT + The camera chooses the mechanical or electronic
MECHANICAL front curtain shutter according to shooting conditions.
The camera chooses the mechanical, electronic, or
w E-FRONT +
electronic front curtain shutter according to shooting
MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC
conditions.
If s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER, u MECHANICAL  + ELECTRONIC,
or w E-FRONT + MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC is selected, shut-
ter speeds faster than 1⁄8000 s can be chosen by rotating the shut-
ter speed dial to 8000 and then rotating the rear command dial.
6
O • When using the electronic shutter, note the following:
- Distortion may be visible in shots of moving subjects.
The Shooting Menus

- Distortion may also be visible in hand-held shots taken at high

shutter speeds; use of a tripod is recommended.
-Banding and fog may occur in shots taken under fluorescent lights
or other flickering or erratic illumination.
- When taking pictures with the shutter muted (P 279), respect
your subjects’ image rights and right to privacy.
• When using the electronic front-curtain shutter, note the following:
- Faster shutter speeds are more likely to result in uneven exposure
and loss of resolution in out-of-focus areas of the frame.
N The following restrictions apply when the electronic shutter is used:
• Sensitivity is restricted to values of ISO 12800–125
• Long exposure noise reduction has no effect
• The flash will not fire unless pixel-shift multi-shot is enabled.

170
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING

Configure the camera to take photos automatically at a preset
interval.

1 Highlight INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING

in the A (SHOOTING SETTING) tab

and press MENU/OK. WITH IN-CAMERA TIMER
WITH EXTERNAL TIMER

2 Highlight WITH IN-CAMERA TIMER INTERVAL/NUMBER OF TIMES

INTERVAL NUMBER OF TIMES

and press MENU/OK.

Interval-timer settings will be dis-
played.
END CANCEL

N IfEXTERNAL
you are using a remote release with its own timer, select WITH
TIMER. You will be returned to the shooting display,
where you can start interval-timer photography using the remote
release. 6

The Shooting Menus

3 Use the selector to choose the interval START WAITING TIME

and number of shots. Press MENU/OK to

proceed. LATER

ESTIMATED START TIME PM

START CANCEL

4 Use the selector to choose the start-

ing time and then press MENU/OK.
Shooting will start automatically.

CANCEL

O Interval timer photography cannot be used at a shutter speed of

“bulb” or with multiple exposure photography. In burst mode, only
one picture will be taken each time the shutter is released.

171
 N • Use of a tripod is recommended.
• We recommend using an AC-5VJ AC power adapter.
• To view the pictures taken so far, press the a button during inter-
val-timer photography. To return to the shooting display, press the
a button again or wait until the start of the next interval.
• The display turns off between shots and lights a few seconds before
the next shot is taken.
• The display can be activated at any time by pressing the shutter button.
• The indicator lamp blinks green whenever the displays are off during
interval-timer photography.
• To continue shooting until the number of shots taken equals the
number of exposures remaining at the time interval-timer photogra-
phy started, set the number of shots to ∞.

INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING EXPOSURE SMOOTHING

Select ON to automatically adjust exposure during interval-timer
photography to prevent it changing dramatically between shots.
Options
ON OFF
6
O • Large changes in subject brightness may make exposure appear er-
The Shooting Menus

ratic. We recommend that you choose shorter values for INTERVAL

TIMER SHOOTING > INTERVAL with subjects that brighten or dim
dramatically during shooting.
• In manual mode (mode M), exposure smoothing is only available if an
A (auto) option is selected for sensitivity.

172
INTERVAL PRIORITY MODE
If ON is selected, the camera will adjust shutter speed during in-
terval-timer photography to ensure that exposures are not lon-
ger than the interval between photographs.
Options
ON OFF

O This option takes effect only when shutter speed is set to A (auto).
FLICKER REDUCTION
Reduce flicker in pictures and the display when shooting under
fluorescent lighting and other similar light sources.
Option Description
Flicker reduction is applied to all frames continuous
ALL FRAMES
shooting frame rate reduces.
Flicker measurement is taken prior to the first frame only
FIRST FRAME and the same reduction amount is applied to all subse-
quent frames that flicker may occur.
OFF Flicker reduction disabled. 6

The Shooting Menus

O • Flicker reduction increases the time needed to record pictures.
• OFF is selected for FLICKER REDUCTION when the electronic shut-
ter is used.
• Flicker reduction is not available during movie recording.

173
 FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING
Select ON to allow shutter speed to be fine-tuned to reduce flick-
er caused by LED lighting and the like.
Options
ON OFF

N This option takes effect only in modes S and M.

IS MODE
Turn image stabilization on or off.
Option Description
CONTINUOUS Image stabilization on.
Image stabilization enabled only when the shutter button
SHOOTING ONLY
is pressed halfway (focus mode C) or the shutter is released.
OFF Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display.

N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with IS MODE.
6 • Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes effect.
The Shooting Menus

174
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

ISO AUTO SETTING

Choose the base sensitivity, maximum sensitivity, and minimum
shutter speed for use when ISO sensitivity is set to A (auto). Set-
tings for AUTO1, AUTO2, and AUTO3 can be stored separately
(P 97).

DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
Zoom in on your subject during shooting using ultra-high-reso-
lution digital zoom.
Option Description
Take pictures using 2× zoom. O- and P-size pictures
2.0x
are automatically cropped to size Q.
Take pictures using 1.4× zoom. O-size pictures are auto-
1.4x
matically cropped to size P.
OFF Digital teleconverter off.

O Image quality may drop when the digital teleconverter is used.

N The digital teleconverter cannot be used when a 1.29× crop is selected 6
during burst photography or when ON is selected for SPORTS FINDER
MODE.

The Shooting Menus

175
 MULTI EXPOSURE
Choose how the camera combines shots to create a multiple ex-
posure.

Option Description
Adjust multiple exposure settings and record multiple expo-
sures.
• ADDITIVE: The camera adds the exposures together. You may
need to lower exposure compensation depending on the
number of shots.
• AVERAGE: The camera automatically optimizes exposure for the
final picture. The background in series shot without changing
ON
the composition will be optimally exposed.
6 • BRIGHT: The camera compares the exposures and chooses only
the brightest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed de-
pending on their brightness and hue.
The Shooting Menus

• DARK: The camera compares the exposures and chooses only

the darkest pixel at each location. Colors may be mixed de-
pending on their brightness and hue.
OFF Multiple exposure mode disabled.

N The camera can combine up to nine exposures.

176
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT

The camera takes a series of 20 shots, using in-body image sta-
bilization to move the image sensor by half a pixel with each
shot and recording each frame in RAW format. Using specialized
computer software, the frames can then be combined to create a
high-resolution RAW picture.

1 Navigate to A SHOOTING SETTING in the photo menus,

highlight PIXEL SHIFT MULTI SHOT, and press MENU/OK.

2 Choose a value for INTERVAL.

• We recommend setting INTERVAL to SHORTEST.
• If you intend to use the flash with every shot, choose a val-
ue for INTERVAL long enough to allow the flash to charge
between shots.

3 Press the shutter button to start shooting.

• The shots are recorded to the memory card in RAW format.
• To minimize vibration, use the self-timer or a remote re-
lease. 6
4 Combine the shots on a computer.

The Shooting Menus

• The shots can be combined using FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner.
• To save high-resolution RAW pictures in other formats, use
Capture One Express for Fujifilm, Capture One for Fujifilm,
or Capture One Pro, available from Capture One A/S. FUJIF-
ILM X RAW STUDIO and RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered
by SILKYPIX cannot be used for this purpose.

177
 N • Visit the websites below to learn more about or download the follow-
ing computer software:
- FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner:
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/pixel-shift-combiner/
- Capture One Express for Fujifilm:
https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm
- Capture One for Fujifilm:
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm
- Capture One Pro:
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features
• Pixel-shift multi-shot photography can be performed via tethered
shooting. For this purpose, use FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner.
• The flash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of ½5 s
or slower.
• The following limitations apply to the use of the pixel-shift multi-shot
option:
- Pixel-shift multi-shot photography can only be performed using the elec-
tronic shutter.
- Sensitivity is restricted to a maximum of ISO 1600. Choosing higher values
or a setting of AUTO results in a sensitivity of ISO 1600, while lower values
remain unchanged.
6 - The only option available for RAW RECORDING is LOSSLESS COMPRESSED.
- Pictures taken with C (AF-C) selected for focus mode will be shot in focus
mode S (AF-S). Pictures taken with S (AF-S) or M (manual) selected are shot
The Shooting Menus

in the chosen focus mode.

- If the subject or camera moves during shooting, the desired results may
not be achieved when the shots are combined.
- A SHOOTING SETTING > FLICKER REDUCTION is automatically set to OFF.
- The value selected for exposure compensation applies to all 20 shots.

Playback
Pictures taken using the pixel-shift multi-shot
option are indicated by a pixel-shift multi-shot
icon in full-frame playback (P 220).

178
 SHOOTING SETTING (Still Photography)

xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest version of apps. The
smartphone can then be used to:
• Control the camera and take pictures remotely
• Receive pictures uploaded from the camera
• Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-
tures
• Upload location data to the camera
N For more information, visit:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

The Shooting Menus

179
 FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust flash-related settings for still photography.
To display flash settings, press MENU/OK FLASH SETTING

in the photo shooting display and select FLASH FUNCTION SETTING

RED EYE REMOVAL
the F (FLASH SETTING) tab. TTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTING
COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING

EXIT

FLASH FUNCTION SETTING

MODE
Choose a flash control mode, flash mode, EF-X8
or sync mode or adjust the flash level.
The options available vary with the flash.
N For more information on flash settings, see
“External Flash Units” (P 341) in “Peripher- ADJUST END

als and Optional Accessories”.

RED EYE REMOVAL

6 Remove red-eye effects caused by the flash.
Option Description
The Shooting Menus

FLASH Flash red-eye reduction only.

OFF Flash red-eye reduction and digital red-eye removal off.

N Flash red-eye reduction can be used in TTL flash control mode.

180
 FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)

TTL-LOCK MODE
Instead of adjusting flash level with each shot, TTL flash control
can be locked for consistent results across a series of photo-
graphs.
Option Description
Flash output is locked at the value metered for the most
LOCK WITH LAST FLASH
recent photo.
LOCK WITH METERING The camera emits a series of pre-flashes and locks flash
FLASH output at the metered value.

N • To use TTL lock, assign TTL-LOCK to a camera control and then use
the control to enable or disable TTL lock (P 321).
• Flash compensation can be adjusted while TTL lock is in effect.
• Selecting LOCK WITH LAST FLASH displays an error message if no
previously metered value exists.

LED LIGHT SETTING

Choose whether to use the flash unit’s LED video light (if avail-
able) as a catchlight or AF-assist illuminator when taking photos. 6
Option Role of LED video light in still photography

The Shooting Menus

CATCHLIGHT Catchlight
AF ASSIST AF-assist illuminator
AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT AF-assist illuminator and catchlight
OFF None

N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.

181
 FLASH SETTING (Still Photography)

COMMANDER SETTING
Choose groups when using the camera flash unit as a command-
er for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control. This option is
available when the camera is used with clip-on flash units that
support Fujifilm optical wireless flash control.

Options
Gr A Gr B Gr C OFF

N In some cases, this option can also be accessed via the FLASH FUNCTION
SETTING menu.

CH SETTING
Choose the channel used for communication between the com-
mander and remote flash units. Separate channels can be used
for different flash systems or to prevent interference when multi-
ple systems are operating in close proximity.
Options
6 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
The Shooting Menus

182
 MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)
Adjust options for movies shot during still photography
using function buttons that have been assigned MOVIE
RECORDING RELEASE.
To display movie settings, press MENU/OK MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE MODE
in the photo shooting display and select HIGH SPEED REC
MEDIA REC SETTING
the B (MOVIE SETTING) tab. F IS MODE
F IS MODE BOOST
AUDIO SETTING

N The options available vary with the shoot- FREC FRAME INDICATOR

ing mode selected. EXIT

MOVIE MODE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 188). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.

HIGH SPEED REC

This item is also found in the movie menus (P 189). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.
6
MEDIA REC SETTING

The Shooting Menus

This item is also found in the movie menus (P 190). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.

183
 F IS MODE
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 196). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.

F IS MODE BOOST
This item is also found in the movie menus (P 196). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.

AUDIO SETTING
Adjust audio-related settings for movie recording.

INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
Option Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
MANUAL
levels.
OFF Turn the built-in microphone off.
6
EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
The Shooting Menus

Adjust the recording level for external microphones.

Option Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
MANUAL
levels.
OFF Disable recording using external microphones.

184
 MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)

MIC JACK SETTING

Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack.
Option Description
Choose this option for direct connection to an external micro-
MIC
phone.
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
LINE
line output.

MIC LEVEL LIMITER

Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
ON OFF

WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.
Options 6
ON OFF

The Shooting Menus

LOW CUT FILTER
Choose whether to enable the low-cut filter, reducing low-fre-
quency noise during movie recording.
Options
ON OFF

HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option Description
0 Mute output to the headphones.
1—10 Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.

185
 MOVIE SETTING (Still Photography)

XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING

Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
Option Description
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with the
help of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel
(stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the
XLR microphone adapter.
MIC INPUT CHANNEL • 4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound with
the help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
• 2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
Choose the source of sound output to headphones or
other audio monitors during movie recording.
4ch AUDIO MONITORING • XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con-
nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
• CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in mi-
crophone.
6 Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector.
• XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via
The Shooting Menus

HDMI 4ch AUDIO the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI con-
OUTPUT nector.
• CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is
output to the HDMI connector.

N • If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone

jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
• Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected for
movie file format.

F REC FRAME INDICATOR

This item is also found in the movie menus (P 198). Changes
here also apply to the item in the movie menus.

186
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust movie-recording options.
To display options for movie recording, MOVIE SETTING
MOVIE SETTING LIST
press MENU/OK in the movie shooting dis- MOVIE MODE
HIGH SPEED REC
play and select the B (MOVIE SETTING) FSELF-TIMER
MEDIA REC SETTING
tab. HDMI OUTPUT SETTING
FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
F-Log/HLG RECORDING
EXIT

MOVIE SETTING LIST

View current movie recording settings.
N These options can also be viewed by pressing the DISP/BACK button while
the movie quick menu is displayed.

The Shooting Menus

187
 MOVIE MODE
Before shooting movies, choose the MOVIE MODE

frame rate and the frame size and aspect

ratio.

HIGH QUALITY 4K MOVIE

WITH 6.2K OVERSAMPLING
CANNOT USE S.S. SLOWER THAN FRAMERATE
END CANCEL

1 In the shooting menu, select B MOVIE SETTING, then high-

light MOVIE MODE and press MENU/OK.

2 Press the selector up or down to highlight the desired frame

size and aspect ratio (A) and press the selector right.
• Choose J16 : 9 for 6.2 K movies with an aspect ratio of
16 : 9.
• Choose T16:9 or W17:9 for high-quality 4 K movies
with aspect ratios of 16 or 17 to 9.
• Choose V16 : 9 or d17 : 9 for 4K movies with aspect ra-
6 tios of 16 or 17 to 9.
• Choose W16 : 9 or W17 : 9 for Full HD movies with aspect
The Shooting Menus

ratios of 16 or 17 to 9.

3 Highlight a frame rate (B) and press MENU/OK.

Options
23.98P 24P 25P 29.97P 50P 59.94P

N The choice of frame rates varies with the movie mode.

188
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

HIGH SPEED REC

Record high-frame-rate movies. High-frame-rate movies can be
played back in slow motion, giving you time to view fast-moving
subjects or details too fleeting for the naked eye. Select ON to
choose the recording and playback rates separately.
N Choose ON HDMI ONLY to record footage only to external recorders
connected via HDMI. Note that this option does not support playback
frame-rate selection.

Frame Size

Options
W16 : 9 W17 : 9

Playback

Options
23.98P 24P 25P 29.97P 50P 59.94P

Recording 6

The Shooting Menus

Options
100P 120P 200P 240P

N • High-speed movies are recorded with no sound.

• The footage recorded to the memory card is compressed with the
goal of maintaining the selected bit rate.
• The options available for playback rate vary with the option selected
for rate of recording.

189
 F SELF-TIMER
Choose the delay between the shutter button being pressed all
the way down and the start of recording.
• The display shows the number of sec-
onds remaining before recording be-
gins.
• To stop the timer before recording be-
gins, press DISP/BACK.

Options
3 SEC 5 SEC 10 SEC OFF

MEDIA REC SETTING

Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, com-
pression, and bit rate.

MEDIA REC SETTING

Choose movie file settings, including destination, file type, and
6 compression.
Destination
The Shooting Menus

Choose save options and save and output destinations for mov-
ies.
Option Description
Footage is recorded to the memory card in Slot 1 until the card
x fills. Any additional footage will then automatically be record-
ed to the card in Slot 2.
Footage is recorded to the memory card in Slot 2 until the card
y fills. Any additional footage will then automatically be record-
ed to the card in Slot 1.
z Each movie is recorded twice, once to each card.
U Movies are recorded only to devices connected via HDMI.

O The current movie mode applies to both copies; settings for backup
copies cannot be adjusted separately.

190
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

File Type and Compression

Choose the movie file type and compression.
Option Description
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is recorded
H.264 ALL-I 420
at a depth of 8 bits using All-I interframe compression and
MOV
4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A highly-portable compressed format. Footage is recorded
H.264 LongGOP 420
at a depth of 8 bits using Long GOP interframe compression
MOV
and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
H.264 LongGOP 420 A format suitable for movies that will be uploaded to the
MP4 web.
A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. Foot-
H.265 ALL-I 420
age is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using All-I interframe
MOV
compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. Foot-
H.265 LongGOP 420
age is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using Long GOP inter-
MOV
frame compression and 4 : 2 : 0 chroma sub-sampling.
A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. Foot-
H.265 ALL-I 422
age is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using All-I interframe
MOV
compression and 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling. 6
A format with a higher compression ratio than H.264. Foot-
H.265 LongGOP 422

The Shooting Menus

age is recorded at a depth of 10 bits using Long GOP inter-
MOV
frame compression and 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling.

N • 4 : 2 : 2 chroma sub-sampling is used for footage output to external

devices connected via HDMI; H.264 footage is output at a bit depth of
8 bits and footage in other formats at a depth of 10 bits.
• All-I compresses each frame separately. Files are larger, but the fact
that the data for each frame are saved separately makes this a good
choice for footage that will be further processed.
• Long GOP balances good image quality with high compression. Files
are smaller, making it a good choice for longer movies.
• The options available for file type and compression vary with the op-
tions selected for MOVIE MODE, HIGH SPEED REC, and F-Log/HLG
RECORDING.

191
 Bit Rate
Choose the movie bit rate.
Options
50Mbps 100Mbps 200Mbps 360Mbps

N The options available for bit rate vary with the settings chosen for high-
speed movie recording and compression. The actual bit rate may be
slower than the selected value depending on the subject.

HDMI OUTPUT SETTING

Adjust settings for use when the shooting display is output to an
HDMI device.

HDMI OUTPUT INFO DISPLAY

If ON is selected, HDMI devices to which the camera is connected
will mirror the information in the camera display.
Options
ON OFF
6
HDMI REC CONTROL
The Shooting Menus

Choose whether the camera sends movie start and stop signals
to the HDMI device when the shutter button is pressed to start
and stop movie recording.
Options
ON OFF

192
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

RAW OUTPUT SETTING

Choose whether to output RAW footage to external recorders
connected via HDMI.
Option Description
RAW OUTPUT
Output RAW footage to ATOMOS video recorders.
SETTING ATOMOS
RAW OUTPUT
Output RAW footage to Blackmagic Design video recorders.
SETTING Blackmagic
OFF Do not output RAW footage to external recorders.

N • Movie frame size automatically changes to 6.2K.

• RAW footage output to external devices is not saved to the memory
cards inserted in the camera.
• In-camera image enhancements are not applied to the RAW output.
• ISO sensitivity is restricted to values between ISO 800 and ISO 12800.
• Footage output to external devices is generated from the original
RAW data and its quality, which varies with device specifications, may
not be equal to that achieved as the end result of post-production
or the like.
• Focus zoom is not available when RAW is selected for HDMI output. 6
• RAW footage output via HDMI to incompatible devices will not dis-
play correctly but will instead will display as a mosaic.

The Shooting Menus

• RAW output is disabled in some movie and high-speed recording
modes.

FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION

Fix the movie crop ratio at 1.25∶1. This makes it easier to match
crops after changing movie settings.
Options
ON OFF

193
 F-Log/HLG RECORDING
Choose the destination for F‐Log and HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma)
movies shot while the camera is connected to an HDMI device.
Option Description
The footage is processed using film simulation and both
cPYP
saved to the memory card and output to the HDMI device.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
c F-Log Y F-Log
the HDMI device in F-Log format.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
c FLog2 Y FLog2
the HDMI device in F-Log2 format.
The footage is recorded to the memory card and output to
c HLG Y HLG
the HDMI device in HLG format.

N • F-Log and FLog2 offer gentle gamma curves with wide gamuts suit-
able for further processing post-production. Sensitivity is restricted to
values between ISO 500 and ISO 12800 (F-Log) or between ISO 1000
and ISO 12800 (FLog2).
• The HLG (Hybrid Log-Gamma) recording format conforms to the in-
ternational ITU-R BT2100 standard. When viewed on HLG-compatible
6 displays, high-quality HLG footage faithfully captures high-contrast
scenes and vivid colors. Sensitivity is restricted to values between
ISO 800 and ISO 12800.
The Shooting Menus

• Film simulation (P) footage is recorded using the option selected

for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING  > F FILM SIMULATION in the
shooting menu.

194
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

DATA LEVEL SETTING

Choose a signal range for movie recording.
Option Description
The signal range for 8-bit movies is limited to 16–235 and that
VIDEO RANGE
for 10-bit movies to 64–940.
The signal ranges for 8-bit and 10-bit movies are respectively
FULL RANGE
0–255 and 0–1023.

F PHOTOMETRY
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 98).

F FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING

Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 174).
Options
ON OFF
6

The Shooting Menus

195
 F IS MODE
Turn image stabilization on or off.
Option Description
Enable in-body (IBIS) and optical (OIS) image stabilization.
IBIS/OIS
IBIS is used with lenses that do not support OIS.
Enable in-body (IBIS), optical (OIS), and digital (DIS) image
IBIS/OIS + DIS stabilization. The crop is adjusted according to the option
selected for MOVIE MODE.
OFF Image stabilization off ; x appears in the display.

N • The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any,
takes priority over the setting chosen with the IS mode.
• Note that vibration or camera sounds may be noticeable as image
stabilization takes effect.

F IS MODE BOOST
Choose the image stabilization level.
Option Description
ON Suitable for hand-held shooting with no panning.
6 OFF Suitable for hand-held shooting with panning.
The Shooting Menus

N Assigning IS MODE BOOST to a function button allows the image sta-

bilization level to be changed while recording is in progress (P 321).

196
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

ZEBRA SETTING
Highlights that may be overexposed are shown by zebra stripes
in the movie mode display.
Option Description
ZEBRA RIGHT Right-slanting stripes.
ZEBRA LEFT Left-slanting stripes.
OFF Stripes off.

ZEBRA LEVEL
Choose the brightness threshold for the zebra stripe display.
Options
50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100

The Shooting Menus

197
 MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
Select ON to allow movie settings to be adjusted using only the
command dials and touch-screen controls. You may find this
helpful in preventing the sounds of camera controls being re-
corded with movies (P 28).
Options
ON OFF

F REC FRAME INDICATOR

If ON is selected, the borders of the display will turn red during
movie recording.
Options
ON OFF

N The borders are displayed in green during high-speed movie record-

ing.

6
The Shooting Menus

198
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

TALLY LIGHT
Choose the lamp (indicator or AF-assist) that lights during movie
recording and whether the lamp blinks or remains steady.

Indicator lamp AF-assist illuminator

Option Description
FRONT OFF
The indicator lamp lights during movie recording.
REAR z
FRONT OFF
The indicator lamp blinks during movie recording.
REAR y
FRONT z
The indicator and AF-assist lamps light during movie recording.
REAR z
FRONT z
The AF-assist lamp lights during movie recording.
REAR OFF 6
FRONT y
The indicator and AF-assist lamps blink during movie recording.

The Shooting Menus

REAR y
FRONT y
The AF-assist lamp blinks during movie recording.
REAR OFF
FRONT OFF
The indicator and AF-assist lamps remain off during movie recording.
REAR OFF

199
 MOVIE SETTING (Movie Recording)

F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING

Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 134).

F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING

Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 134).

F AUTO UPDATE CUSTOM SETTING

This item is also found in the photo menus (P 139).

xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 179).

6
The Shooting Menus

200
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust image quality settings for movies.
To display image quality settings, press IMAGE QUALITY SETTING
FFILM SIMULATION
MENU/OK in the movie shooting display and FMONOCHROMATIC COLOR
FWHITE BALANCE
select the H (IMAGE QUALITY SETTING) FDYNAMIC RANGE
FTONE CURVE
tab. FCOLOR
FSHARPNESS
FHIGH ISO NR
EXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.

F FILM SIMULATION
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 122).

F MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 124).
6

The Shooting Menus

201
 F WHITE BALANCE
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 126).

F DYNAMIC RANGE
Choose a dynamic range for movie recording.
Option Description
V100%
W200% See “DYNAMIC RANGE” (P 130).
X400%

N • AUTO  (automatic dynamic range control) is not available during

movie recording.
• W200% is available at sensitivities of from ISO 250 to ISO 12800,
X400% at sensitivities of from ISO 500 to 12800.
• This item is available when cPYP is selected for B MOVIE
SETTING > F-Log/HLG RECORDING.

F TONE CURVE
6
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
The Shooting Menus

must be adjusted separately (P 131).

F COLOR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 131).

202
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)

F SHARPNESS
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 131).

F HIGH ISO NR
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 132).

INTERFRAME NR
Select AUTO to automatically adjust interframe noise reduction
according to shooting conditions.
Options
AUTO OFF

N “Ghosting” may occur with moving subjects or if the camera is moved

during shooting.

The Shooting Menus

203
 IMAGE QUALITY SETTING (Movie Recording)

F PERIPHERAL LIGHT CORRECTION

Select ON to enable peripheral illumination correction during
movie recording.
Options
ON OFF

N • If ON is selected when a lens that does not transmit data to the camera
is attached, peripheral illumination will be adjusted according to the
option selected for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING  > xF MOUNT
ADAPTER SETTING > PERIPHERAL ILLUMINATION CORRECTION
in the shooting menu (P 142).
• Select OFF if you notice banding in movies recorded using this op-
tion.

xF MOUNT ADAPTOR SETTING

This item is also found in the photo menus (P 140). Changes to
one apply to the other.

6
The Shooting Menus

204
 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust focus settings for movies.
To display AF/MF settings, press MENU/OK AF/MF SETTING
FFOCUS AREA
in the movie shooting display and select F AF MODE
FAF-C CUSTOM SETTING
the G (AF/MF SETTING) tab. xFWRAP FOCUS POINT
xFAF ILLUMINATOR
Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
FSUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
FAF+MF
EXIT

N The options available vary with the shooting mode selected.

F FOCUS AREA
Choose the focus area for autofocus, manual focus, and focus
zoom (P 87).
O The focus area cannot be resized while recording is in progress.
F AF MODE
Choose how the camera selects the focus point for movie recording.
Option Description 6
MULTI The camera selects the focus area automatically.

The Shooting Menus

AREA The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus area.

205
 F AF-C CUSTOM SETTING
Select focus-tracking options when recording movies in focus
mode C.

TRACKING SENSITIVITY
Choose how long the camera waits to switch focus when an ob-
ject enters the focus area behind or in front of the current sub-
ject. See “TRACKING SENSITIVITY” (P 145).
Options
0 1 2 3 4

O • The higher the value, the longer it takes the camera to refocus when
you attempt to switch subjects.
• The lower the value, the more likely the camera is to switch focus
from your subject to other objects in the focus area.

AF SPEED
Adjust the autofocus response speed. Choose higher values for
faster response times, lower values for slower response times.
6
Options
The Shooting Menus

−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5

xF WRAP FOCUS POINT

This item is also found in the photo menus (P 148). Changes to
one apply to the other.

206
 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)

xF AF ILLUMINATOR
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 150). Changes to
one apply to the other.

Fg FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING

Enable or disable Intelligent Face Detection when recording
movies.
Option Description
FACE DETECTION ON See “g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING” (P 151).
OFF Intelligent Face Detection and eye priority off.

O When Intelligent Face Detection is enabled, the camera will focus us-
ing continuous AF even when single AF (S) is chosen with the focus
mode selector. Intelligent Face Detection is not available in manual
focus mode.

F SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING

Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 153). 6
O The camera automatically switches to continuous AF when SUBJECT

The Shooting Menus

DETECTION ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING  > F SUBJECT
DETECTION SETTING, even if the focus mode selector is rotated to S.
Subject detection is not available in manual focus mode.

F AF+MF
Select ON to enable manual focus in focus modes S and C. Manual
focus can be suspended by pressing the AFON button.
Options
ON OFF

207
 F MF ASSIST
Choose how focus is displayed in manual focus mode (P 94).
Option Description
The camera heightens high-contrast outlines. Choose a
FOCUS PEAK HIGHLIGHT
color and peaking level.
FOCUS METER A needle indicates whether focus is in front of or behind
the subject.
FOCUS METER + PEAK
HIGHLIGHT Focus is indicated by both a meter and peak highlights.
Focus is displayed normally (focus peaking and the focus
OFF
meter are not available).

F FOCUS CHECK
Options are the same as those for still photography, but settings
must be adjusted separately (P 156).

xF INSTANT AF SETTING
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 157). Changes to
6 one apply to the other.
N Instant AF is disabled during movie recording. Use instant AF to focus
The Shooting Menus

before recording begins.

208
 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)

xF DEPTH-OF-FIELD SCALE
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 157). Changes to
one apply to the other.

xF AF RANGE LIMITER
This item is also found in the photo menus (P 159). Changes to
one apply to the other.

The Shooting Menus

209
 F TOUCH SCREEN MODE
Choose the shooting operations performed using touch controls.
Mode Description
Tapping the display focuses the camera on the selected point.
Use the shutter button to start and stop recording.
• In focus mode S (AF-S), you can refocus at any time by tapping
your subject in the display.
• In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust
AF focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point se-
lected by tapping the display.
• When shooting movies in focus mode M (MF), you can tap the
display before recording begins to focus on the selected point
using Instant AF, and tap the display during recording to posi-
tion the focus point.
Tap to position the focus area. Use the shutter button to start
and stop recording.
• In focus mode S (AF-S), you can reposition the focus area at
any time by tapping your subject in the display. To focus, use
the button to which AF-ON is assigned.
AREA
6 • In focus mode C (AF-C), the camera will continuously adjust
focus for changes in the distance to the subject at point se-
The Shooting Menus

lected by tapping the display.

• In manual focus mode (MF), you can tap the display to posi-
tion the focus area over your subject.

OFF Touch screen mode off.

N • The behavior of the touch screen varies with the AF mode.

• To disable touch controls and hide the touch screen mode indica-
tor, select OFF for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING  > TOUCH SCREEN
SETTING > x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING.

210
 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)

Touch Controls for Focus Zoom

Different touch controls are used during focus zoom (focus check enabled).
Central Area
Tapping the center of the display performs the
operations below.

Mode Movie Recording

AF-S: AF
AF
MF: Instant AF
AF-S: AF
AREA
MF: Instant AF
OFF AF-S/MF: OFF
Other Areas
Tapping other areas simply scrolls the display,
whether during still photography or movie re-
cording and regardless of the option selected 6
for touch screen mode.

The Shooting Menus

211
 AF/MF SETTING (Movie Recording)

FOCUS CHECK LOCK

Choose whether focus zoom remains in effect once movie re-
cording begins.
Options
ON OFF

6
The Shooting Menus

212
 AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust settings for audio recorded during filming.
To display audio settings, press MENU/OK AUDIO SETTING
INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
in the movie shooting display and select EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT
MIC JACK SETTING
the P (AUDIO SETTING) tab. MIC LEVEL LIMITER
WIND FILTER
LOW CUT FILTER
HEADPHONES VOLUME
XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING
EXIT

INTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the recording level for the built-in microphone.
Option Description
AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
MANUAL
levels.
OFF Turn the built-in microphone off.

EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the recording level for external microphones. 6
Option Description

The Shooting Menus

AUTO The camera adjusts the recording level automatically.
Adjust the recording level manually. Choose from 25 recording
MANUAL
levels.
OFF Disable recording using external microphones.

213
 MIC JACK SETTING
Specify the type of hardware connected to the microphone jack.
Option Description
Choose this option for direct connection to an external micro-
MIC
phone.
Choose this option for external audio devices connected via
LINE
line output.

MIC LEVEL LIMITER

Reduces distortion caused by input that exceeds the limits of the
microphone’s audio circuits.
Options
ON OFF

WIND FILTER
Choose whether to enable wind noise reduction during movie
recording.
6 Options
ON OFF
The Shooting Menus

LOW CUT FILTER

Choose whether to enable the low-cut filter, reducing low-fre-
quency noise during movie recording.
Options
ON OFF

HEADPHONES VOLUME
Adjust the headphone volume.
Option Description
0 Mute output to the headphones.
1—10 Choose a volume of from 1 to 10.

214
 AUDIO SETTING (Movie Recording)

XLR MIC ADAPTER SETTING

Adjust microphone input channel settings and the like for use
with XLR microphone adapters.
Option Description
Record four-channel (quadraphonic) sound with the
help of the camera’s built-in microphone, or two-channel
(stereo) sound using only a microphone connected via the
XLR microphone adapter.
MIC INPUT CHANNEL • 4ch XLR+CAMERA: Record four-channel sound with
the help of the camera’s built-in microphone.
• 2ch XLR ONLY: Record two-channel sound using
only an external microphone connected via the XLR
microphone adapter.
Choose the source of sound output to headphones or
other audio monitors during movie recording.
4ch AUDIO MONITORING • XLR: Monitor sound from external microphones con-
nected via the XLR microphone adapter.
• CAMERA: Monitor sound from camera’s built-in mi-
crophone.
Choose source of audio output to the HDMI connector. 6
• XLR: Audio from external microphones connected via

The Shooting Menus

HDMI 4ch AUDIO the XLR microphone adapter is output to the HDMI con-
OUTPUT nector.
• CAMERA: Audio from camera’s built-in microphone is
output to the HDMI connector.

N • If an external microphone is connected to the camera’s microphone

jack, audio will be recorded not via the camera’s built-in microphone
but via the external microphone instead.
• Four-channel recording is available only when MOV is selected for
movie file format.

215
 TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)
Adjust time code (hour, minute, second, and frame num-
ber) display settings for movie recording.
To display time code settings, press TIME CODE SETTING

MENU/OK in the movie shooting display TIME CODE DISPLAY

START TIME SETTING
and select the Q (TIME CODE SETTING) COUNT UP SETTING
DROP FRAME
tab. HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT

EXIT

TIME CODE DISPLAY

Select ON to display time codes during movie recording and
playback.
Options
ON OFF

START TIME SETTING

Choose the time code starting time.
6
Option Description
The Shooting Menus

MANUAL INPUT Choose a start time manually.

CURRENT TIME Set the start time to the current time.
RESET Set the start time to 00:00:00.

216
 TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)

COUNT UP SETTING
Choose whether time is clocked continuously or only during
movie recording.
Option Description
REC RUN Time is clocked only during movie recording.
FREE RUN Time is clocked continuously.

DROP FRAME
At frame rates of 59.94P, and 29.97P, a discrepancy will gradu-
ally develop between the time code (measured in seconds) and
the actual recording time (measured in fractions of a second).
Choose whether the camera drops frames as necessary to match
the recording time to the time code.
Option Description
The camera drops frames as necessary to maintain a strict
ON
match between the time code and the actual recording time.
OFF Frames are not dropped.

N • The time code display varies with the option selected. 6

The Shooting Menus

ON

OFF
• Selecting a frame rate of 23.98P disables frame drop.

217
 TIME CODE SETTING (Movie Recording)

HDMI TIME CODE OUTPUT

Choose whether time codes are output to HDMI devices.
Options
ON OFF

6
The Shooting Menus

218
Playback and the Playback
Menu

219
 The Playback Display
This section lists the indicators that may be displayed during
playback.
O For illustrative purposes, displays are shown with all indicators lit.
A B CD E FG H I J
12/31/2022 1/999
n
m K
l L
k
j
i
h
Playback and the Playback Menu

g
f
e
d
M

c
b a Z Y X W V U T S RQ P O N
A Date and time..................................48, 50, 273 V White balance ..............................................126
B Frame-number display W Sensitivity ..........................................................96
C Location data................................................310 X Exposure compensation ...............................99
7 D Bluetooth ON/OFF Y Aperture...............................................73, 78, 80
E Image transfer order Z Time code.......................................................216
F Image transfer status a Shutter speed .....................................73, 74, 80
G Number of frames selected for upload b Playback mode indicator .............................56
H Protected image ...........................................234 c Movie icon ........................................................69
I Card slot..........................................................225 d Four-channel (quadrophonic) audio
J Frame number..............................................308 ..............................................................186, 215
K Bluetooth host ..............................................249 e HDR image ....................................................107
L Pixel-shift multi-shot ..................................177 f Red-eye removal indicator........................180
M Low battery ......................................................47 g Advanced filter..............................................109
N Image quality................................................119 h Face detection indicator ............................151
O Movie mode ..................................................188 i Digital teleconverter ...................................175
P HEIF ..................................................................121 j Photobook assist indicator .......................242
Q Image size ......................................................118 k DPOF print indicator ...................................244
R Film format ....................................................191 l Rating..............................................................237
S Film simulation ............................................122 m Voice memo ..................................................236
T Dynamic range ............................................130 n Gift image .........................................................56
U HDR ..................................................................107
220
 The Playback Display

The DISP/BACK Button

The DISP/BACK button controls the display
of indicators during playback.

Standard Information off

12/31/2022
2022.12.31 1/999
1/999

Playback and the Playback Menu

12/31/2022 1/999

NEXT

Info display
7

221
 The Playback Display

Viewing Photo Information

The photo information display changes each
time the selector is pressed up.

Basic data Info display 1

12/31/2022
2022.12.31 1/999
1/999 12/31/2022 1/999
Playback and the Playback Menu

NEXT

LENS 23.0mm
F5.6
FOCAL LENGTH 23.0mm
COLOR SPACE sRGB
1/999
LENS MODULATION OPT. ON
12/31/2022 12:10 AM

S.S F ISO
BACK NEXT

Info display 3 Info display 2

Zooming in on the Focus Point
7 Press the center of the rear command dial to zoom in on the focus point.
Press again to return to full-frame playback.

222
 Viewing Pictures
Read this section for information on playback zoom and
multi-frame playback.
Use the rear command dial to go from
full-frame playback to playback zoom or
multi-frame playback.

Full-frame playback

Playback and the Playback Menu

Multi-frame Playback
playback zoom
DISP/BACK
MENU/OK
Nine-frame view Medium zoom

Hundred- frame view Maximum zoom

223
 Viewing Pictures

Playback Zoom
Rotate the rear command dial right to zoom in on the current
picture, left to zoom out. To exit zoom, press DISP/BACK, MENU/OK,
or the center of the rear command dial.
N The maximum zoom ratio varies with the option selected for H IMAGE
QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE SIZE.
Scroll
When the picture is zoomed in, the selector can
be used to view areas of the image not currently
visible in the display.
Playback and the Playback Menu

Navigation window

Multi-Frame Playback
To change the number of images displayed, rotate the rear com-
mand dial left when a picture is displayed full frame.
N • Use the selector to highlight images and press MENU/OK to view the
highlighted image full frame.
7 • In the nine- and hundred-frame displays, press the selector up or
down to view more pictures.

224
 The Playback Menu
Adjust playback settings.
The playback menu is displayed when PLAY BACK MENU
SWITCH SLOT
you press MENU/OK in playback mode. RAW CONVERSION
HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION
ERASE
SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
CROP
RESIZE
PROTECT
EXIT

SWITCH SLOT
Choose the card from which images will be played back.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N If two memory cards are inserted, you can press and hold the a but-
ton to choose a card for playback.

225
 RAW CONVERSION
Even if you don’t have a computer, you can use the camera to
modify RAW pictures and save them in other formats.

Saving RAW Pictures in Another Format

1 Display a RAW picture.

2 Highlight RAW CONVERSION in the playback menu.
3 Press MENU/OK. RAW CONVERSION

A list of settings will be displayed. REFLECT SHOOTING COND.

FILE TYPE
Playback and the Playback Menu

IMAGE SIZE
IMAGE QUALITY
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING
DYNAMIC RANGE

CREATE CANCEL

4 Press the selector up or down to highlight a setting.

5 Press the selector right to display op- RAW CONVERSION
tions.
100%
200%
400%

7
6 Press the selector up or down to highlight the desired option.
7 Press MENU/OK to select the highlighted option. The settings
list shown in Step 3 will be displayed. Repeat Steps 4 to 7 to
adjust additional settings.
8 Press the Q button.
A preview of the copy will be displayed.
9 Press MENU/OK.
The copy will be saved.
N RAW conversion options can also be displayed by pressing the Q but-
ton when a RAW pictures is displayed during playback.

226
 The Playback Menu

The settings that can be adjusted when converting pictures from

RAW to another format are:
Setting Description
Create a copy using the settings in effect at the time the
REFLECT SHOOTING COND.
photo was taken.
FILE TYPE Choose a file format.
IMAGE SIZE Choose an image size.
IMAGE QUALITY Adjust image quality.
PUSH/PULL PROCESSING Adjust exposure.
DYNAMIC RANGE Enhance details in highlights for natural contrast.
Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows for nat-
D RANGE PRIORITY ural-looking results when photographing high-contrast

Playback and the Playback Menu

scenes.
FILM SIMULATION Simulate the effects of different types of film.
Choose a monochrome tint for photographs tak-
MONOCHROMATIC COLOR en using FILM SIMULATION  > a ACROS and
b MONOCHROME.
GRAIN EFFECT Add a film grain effect.
Increase the range of tones available for rendering col-
COLOR CHROME EFFECT ors that tend to be highly saturated, such as reds, yel-
lows, and greens.
COLOR CHROME FX BLUE Increase the range of tones available for rendering blues.
SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT Smooth complexions.
WHITE BALANCE Adjust white balance. 7
WB SHIFT Fine-tune white balance.
TONE CURVE Adjust highlights and shadows.
COLOR Adjust color density.
SHARPNESS Sharpen or soften outlines.

227
 Setting Description
HIGH ISO NR Process the copy to reduce mottling.
CLARITY Increase definition.
Improve definition by adjusting for diffraction and the
LENS MODULATION OPTIMIZER
slight loss of focus at the periphery of the lens.
COLOR SPACE Choose the color space used for color reproduction.
HDR MODE Reduce loss of detail in highlights and shadows.
DIGITAL TELE-CONV. Switch to the crop in effect when the photo was taken.
O Some settings may be unavailable depending on the options chosen
when the picture was taken.
Playback and the Playback Menu

228
 The Playback Menu

HEIF TO JPEG/TIFF CONVERSION

Convert HEIF pictures to JPEG or TIFF.

SELECT IMAGES
Select HEIF pictures for conversion.

FILE FORMAT
Choose a format for the converted pictures.
Options
JPEG TIFF 8bit TIFF 16bit

Playback and the Playback Menu

SELECT SLOT TO RECORD
Choose the memory card to which the converted pictures will
be saved.
Options
SLOT 1 SLOT 2

229
 ERASE
Delete individual pictures, multiple selected pictures, or all pic-
tures.
O Deleted pictures cannot be recovered. Protect important pictures or
copy them to a computer or other storage device before proceeding.
Option Description
FRAME Delete pictures one at a time.
SELECTED FRAMES Delete multiple selected pictures.
ALL FRAMES Delete all unprotected pictures.
Playback and the Playback Menu

FRAME
1 Select FRAME for ERASE in the playback menu.
2 Press the selector left or right to scroll through pictures and
press MENU/OK to delete.
N • A confirmation dialog is not displayed before pictures are deleted; be
sure the correct picture is selected before pressing MENU/OK.
• Additional pictures can be deleted by pressing MENU/OK. Press
the multi selector left or right to scroll through pictures and press
MENU/OK to delete.
7

230
 The Playback Menu

SELECTED FRAMES
1 Select SELECTED FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.
2 Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK to select.
• Selected pictures are indicated by check marks (R).
• To deselect a highlighted picture, press MENU/OK again.
3 When the operation is complete, press DISP/BACK to display a
confirmation dialog.

4 Highlight OK and press MENU/OK to delete the selected pic-

tures.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N Pictures in photobooks or printer orders are shown by S.
ALL FRAMES
1 Select ALL FRAMES for ERASE in the playback menu.
2 A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and
press MENU/OK to delete all unprotected pictures.
N • Pressing DISP/BACK cancels deletion; note that any pictures deleted
before the button was pressed cannot be recovered.
• If a message appears stating that the selected images are part of a 7
DPOF print order, press MENU/OK to delete the pictures.

231
 SIMULTANEOUS DELETE
Taking photos with SEPARATE selected for D SAVE DATA
SET-UP  >  x CARD SLOT SETTING creates two copies. Choose
whether deleting the RAW image will also delete the JPEG or
HEIF copy.
Option Description
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 also deletes the
ON
JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.
Deleting the RAW image from the card in Slot 1 does not delete
OFF
the JPEG or HEIF copy from the card in Slot 2.
Playback and the Playback Menu

CROP
Create a cropped copy of the current picture.

1 Display the desired picture.

2 Select CROP in the playback menu.

3 Use the rear command dial to zoom in and out and press the
selector up, down, left, or right to scroll the picture until the
desired portion is displayed.

7 4 Press MENU/OK to display a confirmation dialog.

5 Press MENU/OK again to save the cropped copy to a separate

file.
N • The higher the zoom ratio, the smaller the number of pixels in the
cropped copy.
• If the size of the final copy will be a, YES will be displayed in yellow.
• All copies have an aspect ratio of 3∶2.

232
 The Playback Menu

RESIZE
Create a small copy of the current picture.

1 Display the desired picture.

2 Select RESIZE in the playback menu.

3 Highlight a size and press MENU/OK to display a confirmation

dialog.

4 Press MENU/OK again to save the resized copy to a separate

file.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N The sizes available vary with the size of the original image.

233
 PROTECT
Protect pictures from accidental deletion. Highlight one of the
following options and press MENU/OK.
Option Description
Protect selected pictures. Press the selector left or right to view
FRAME pictures and press MENU/OK to select or deselect. Press DISP/BACK
when the operation is complete.
SET ALL Protect all pictures.
RESET ALL Remove protection from all pictures.

O Protected pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted.

Playback and the Playback Menu

N • Protecting images currently selected for upload to paired smart-

phones or tablets removes upload marking.
• Protection can also be added or removed by pressing the AFON but-
ton during playback.

234
 The Playback Menu

IMAGE ROTATE
Rotate pictures.

1 Select ON for D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB.

2 Display the desired picture.

3 Select IMAGE ROTATE in the playback menu.

4 Press the selector down to rotate the picture 90° clockwise,

up to rotate it 90° counterclockwise.

5 Press MENU/OK. The picture will automatically be displayed in

Playback and the Playback Menu

the selected orientation whenever it is played back on the
camera.
N • Protected pictures cannot be rotated. Remove protection before ro-
tating pictures.
• The camera may not be able to rotate pictures created with other
devices. Pictures rotated on the camera will not be rotated when
viewed on a computer or on other cameras.
• Pictures taken with D SCREEN SET-UP > AUTOROTATE PB are auto-
matically displayed in the correct orientation during playback.

235
 VOICE MEMO SETTING
Add a voice memo to the current photograph.

1 Select ON for VOICE MEMO SETTING in the playback menu.

2 Display a photo to which you wish to add a voice memo.

3 Press and hold the center of the front command dial to re-
cord the memo. Recording ends after 30 s or when you re-
lease the dial.
N • The new memo will be recorded over any existing memos.
• Voice memos cannot be added to protected pictures.
Playback and the Playback Menu

• Deleting the picture also deletes the memo.

Playing Voice Memos
Pictures with voice memos are indicated by q icons during playback.
• To play a memo, select the picture and press the center of the front com-
mand dial.
• A progress bar will be displayed while the memo plays back.
• Volume can be adjusted by pressing MENU/OK to pause playback and dis-
play volume controls. Press the selector up or down to adjust the volume
and press MENU/OK again to resume playback. Volume can also be adjust-
ed using D SOUND SET-UP > PLAYBACK VOLUME.
7

236
 The Playback Menu

RATING
Rate pictures using stars.

1 Select RATING in the playback menu.

2 Rotate the front command dial to choose a picture and the

rear command dial to choose a rating of from 0 to 5 stars
(“I”).

N • The selector can be used in place of the front command dial to

choose a picture.
• The rating dialog can also be displayed by pressing the AEL button in

Playback and the Playback Menu

single-frame, nine-frame, or hundred-frame playback.
• Use touch controls to zoom in or out.
• Ratings cannot be applied to:
- Protected pictures
- Movies
- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)

237
 COPY
Copy pictures between the cards in the first and second slots.

1 Select COPY in the playback menu.

2 Highlight one of the following options.

Option Description
Copy pictures from the card in the first slot to the card in
SLOT1 y SLOT2
the second slot.
Copy pictures from the card in the second slot to the card
SLOT2 y SLOT1
in the first slot.
Playback and the Playback Menu

3 Press the selector right.

4 Highlight one of the following options and press MENU/OK.

Option Description
Copy selected pictures. Press the selector left or right to
FRAME view pictures and press MENU/OK to copy the current pic-
ture.
ALL FRAMES Copy all pictures.

O • Copying ends when the destination is full.

7 • If you attempt to copy a file over 4 GB in size to a memory card with
a capacity of 32 GB or less, copying will end and the file will not be
copied.

238
 The Playback Menu

TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE

Select photos for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet via
Bluetooth (P 249).

1 Select TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT FRAMES.

N Select RESET to remove “upload to smartphone” marking from all
pictures before proceeding.

2 Mark pictures for upload. SELECT IMAGE

FRAME

Highlight pictures and press MENU/OK

to mark them for upload.

Playback and the Playback Menu

• To switch to the memory card in the
other slot or display only pictures SELECT ALL SELECT RANGE

that meet selected criteria, press SELECT FINISH/SETTING

DISP/BACK before marking begins.

• To select all pictures, press the Q but-
ton.
• Selecting any two pictures with the
AEL button also selects all pictures
between them.

3 Press DISP/BACK and select START SELECT FRAMES 7

TRANSFER. START TRANSFER
FILTERING
The selected pictures will be upload- SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT

ed. FINISH IMAGE SELECT AND

START TRANSFER

239
 Filtering Pictures/Choosing a Slot
To switch to the memory card in the other slot or display only pictures that
meet selected criteria, press DISP/BACK in the picture-selection dialog.
• To display only pictures that meet selected cri- SELECT FRAMES
teria, choose FILTERING. START TRANSFER

• To switch to the memory card in the other slot, FILTERING

SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT
choose SWITCH MEMORY CARD SLOT.
FILTERING THE IMAGE
WITH CONDITIONS

O Switching slots or changing the filter criteria removes any existing up-
load marking.
Playback and the Playback Menu

N • Image transfer orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures.

• The following cannot be selected for upload:
- Protected pictures
- Movies
- RAW images
- “Gift” pictures (pictures taken with other cameras)
• If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING  > Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will
7 continue even while the camera is off.
• When a SMARTPHONE TRANSFER ORDER is selected for
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING  > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, the pic-
ture-selection dialog can be displayed by pressing the Fn1 button.

240
 The Playback Menu

xF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
Connect to smartphones running the latest apps. The smartphone
can then be used to:
• Control the camera and take pictures remotely
• Receive pictures uploaded from the camera
• Browse the pictures on the camera and download selected pic-
tures
• Upload location data to the camera
N • For downloads and other information, visit:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

Playback and the Playback Menu

• If r WIRELESS COMMUNICATION is selected for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING, you can connect to the
smartphone using the Fn1 button.

SLIDE SHOW
View pictures in an automated slide show. Press MENU/OK to start
and press the selector right or left to skip ahead or back. Press
DISP/BACK at any time during the show to view on-screen help.
The show can be ended at any time by pressing MENU/OK.
N The camera will not turn off automatically while a slide show is in prog- 7
ress.

241
 PHOTOBOOK ASSIST
Create books from your favorite photos.

Creating a Photobook
1 Select NEW BOOK for C PLAY BACK MENU > PHOTOBOOK
ASSIST.

2 Scroll through the images and press the selector up to select

or deselect. Press MENU/OK to exit when the book is complete.
N • Neither photographs a or smaller nor movies can be selected
for photobooks.
Playback and the Playback Menu

• The first picture selected becomes the cover image. Press the fo-
cus stick down to select the current image for the cover instead.

3 Highlight COMPLETE PHOTOBOOK and press MENU/OK (to se-

lect all photos for the book, choose SELECT ALL). The new
book will be added to the list in the photobook assist menu.
N • Books can contain up to 300 pictures.
• Books that contain no photos are automatically deleted.

242
 The Playback Menu

Viewing Photobooks
Highlight a book in the photobook assist menu and press MENU/OK
to display the book, then press the selector left or right to scroll
through the pictures.

Editing and Deleting Photobooks

Display the photobook and press MENU/OK. The following options
will be displayed; select the desired option and follow the on-
screen instructions.
• EDIT: Edit the book as described in “Creating a Photobook”.
• ERASE: Delete the book.

Playback and the Playback Menu

7

243
 PRINT ORDER (DPOF)
Create a digital “print order” for DPOF-compatible printers.

1 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > PRINT ORDER (DPOF).

2 Select WITH DATE s to print the date of recording on pic-

tures, WITHOUT DATE to print pictures without dates, or
RESET ALL to remove all pictures from the print order before
proceeding.

3 Display a picture you wish to include in or remove from the

print order.
Playback and the Playback Menu

4 Press the selector up or down to PRINT ORDER (DPOF)

DPOF: 00001
choose the number of copies (up to
99).
N To remove a picture from the order, 01 SHEETS
press the selector down until the num- FRAME SET
ber of copies is 0.
Total number
of prints
Number of copies

7
N Repeat steps 3–4 to complete the print order.
5 The total number of prints is displayed in the monitor. Press
MENU/OK to exit.
N • The pictures in the current print order are indicated by a u icon
during playback.
• Print orders can contain a maximum of 999 pictures from a single
memory card.
• If a memory card is inserted containing a print order created by an-
other camera, you will need to delete the order before creating as
described above.

244
 The Playback Menu

instax PRINTER PRINT

To print pictures to optional Fujifilm instax SHARE printers, first
select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/
USB settings menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name
(SSID) and password, then follow the steps below.

1 Turn the printer on.

2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > instax PRINTER PRINT

PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con- instax-12345678

nect to the printer. CONNECTING
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234

Playback and the Playback Menu

CANCEL

3 Use the selector to display the pic- PRINTER PRINT

100-0020
ture you want to print, then press
MENU/OK. The picture will be sent to
the printer and printing will start.
SET CANCEL
instax-12345678

N • Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.

• The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD 7
monitor.
• The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.

245
 DISP ASPECT
Choose the aspect ratio used for the display of still pictures on
High Definition (HD) devices (this option is available only when
an HDMI cable is connected).

Options
16 : 9 3:2
Playback and the Playback Menu

N Choose 16 : 9 to display photos with an aspect ratio of 3 : 2 full screen.

The pictures will be displayed full screen with tops and bottoms
cropped out.

246
Network/USB Features and
Settings

247
 Overview
This chapter outlines features that can among other things
be used to upload pictures to, or control the camera and
take pictures remotely from, a smartphone or computer.

Supported Features
This camera supports the following features:
Feature Description P
Connect to smartphones via Bluetooth® and upload
Connecting to the
pictures or control the camera remotely while the 249
smartphone app
smartphone displays the view through the lens.
Connect a card reader to a computer or smartphone
Network/USB Features and Settings

USB card readers 252

via USB and copy pictures from memory cards.
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use
Web camera 257
as a webcam.
instax printers Print pictures on connected instax printers. 258
Take pictures from a computer to which the camera
Tethered photography 260
is connected (“tethered”) via wireless LAN or USB.
Harness the power of the camera’s image
RAW processing processing engine when processing RAW pictures 262
on a computer.
Saving and Loading Save camera settings to, or load existing settings
263
Settings from, a computer or smartphone.
8

248
 Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)
Connect the camera with a smartphone via Bluetooth® to
copy pictures to the smartphone or control the camera re-
motely while previewing the view through the lens in the
smartphone display.
N The camera automatically switches to a wireless LAN connection when
copying pictures to the smartphone.

Installing Smartphone Apps

Before establishing a connection between the smartphone and
camera, you will need to install at least one dedicated smart-
phone app. Visit the following website and install the desired

Network/USB Features and Settings

apps on your phone.

https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

N The apps available vary with the smartphone operating system.

Connecting to a Smartphone
Pair the camera with the smartphone and connect via Bluetooth®.
8
1 Press the x(Bluetooth) button when
the camera is in shooting mode.

N You can also proceed directly to Step 3 by holding the x button

during playback.

249
 2 Highlight Bluetooth and press MENU/OK. Bluetooth & FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
X-T5123456 Bluetooth
Fn1
Fn2
Fn3
Fn4
Fn5
Fn6
T-Fn1

3 Highlight PAIRING and press MENU/OK. Bluetooth

PAIRING
Bluetooth ON/OFF
Network/USB Features and Settings

4 Launch the app on the smartphone and pair the smartphone

with the camera.
More information is available at the following website:
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/
When pairing is complete, the cam-
era and smartphone will automati-
cally connect via Bluetooth. A smart-
phone icon and a white Bluetooth
icon will appear in the camera display
when a connection is established.
8
N • Once the devices have been paired, the smartphone will automati-
cally connect to the camera when the app is launched.
• Disabling Bluetooth when the camera is not connected to a smart-
phone reduces the drain on the battery.

250
 Connecting to Smartphones (Bluetooth)

Using the Smartphone App

Read this section for information on the options available for
downloading pictures to your smartphone using the smart-
phone app.
N Before proceeding, select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE
SETTING > Bluetooth ON/OFF.

Selecting and Downloading Pictures Using the Smartphone App

You can download selected pictures to a smartphone using the
smartphone app.
N More information is available from the following website:

Network/USB Features and Settings

https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken

Pictures taken with ON selected for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE
SETTING > AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER in the network/USB
setting menu will automatically be uploaded to the paired de-
vice.
N • If ON is selected for both IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
and Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING  > Bluetooth ON/OFF in
the network/USB settings menu, upload to the paired device will
continue even while the camera is off. 8
• Selecting ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING  > RESIZE
IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE in the network/USB setting menu en-
ables compression, reducing file size for upload (P 266).
• Pictures are uploaded in the format chosen for Bluetooth/
SMARTPHONE SETTING > SELECT FILE TYPE in the network/USB
setting menu.

Selecting Pictures for Upload in the Playback Menu

Use TRANSFER IMAGE TO SMARTPHONE > SELECT FRAMES to
select pictures for upload to a paired smartphone or tablet via
Bluetooth® (P 239).

251
 Connecting to Smartphones (USB)
Connect to smartphones and computers via USB to upload
pictures from the camera.

Copying Pictures to a Smartphone

Before connecting to the smartphone to upload pictures via USB,
select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB
POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting
menu.

For Customers Using Android Devices

How you will connect the camera depends on the type of USB
Network/USB Features and Settings

connector with which your smartphone is equipped.

Type-C
Use the supplied USB cable.
Supplied USB cable

Type-C connector (male) Type-C connector (male)

8

252
 Connecting to Smartphones (USB)

Micro-B
Use a USB on-the-go (OTG) cable.
Third-party USB cable USB OTG cable

Type-C connector (male) Micro-B connector (male)

Type-A connector Type-A connector

(male) (female)

Network/USB Features and Settings

O • The smartphone must support USB OTG.
• The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-C–to–
Mirco-B cable. Use an OTG cable.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for

USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Select USB CARD READER for CONNECTION MODE.

3 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable.

N If the smartphone asks for permission for an app other than the
“Camera Importer” to access the camera, tap “Cancel” and move 8
on to the next step.

4 On your smartphone, tap the notification “Connected to USB

PTP”.

253
 5 From the recommended apps, select “Camera Importer”.
The app will automatically start and allow you to import pho-
tos and movies to your smartphone.
N If the message “There is no MTP device connected” appears on the
app, please try again from step 3.

For Customers Using iOS

Use a camera adapter. Given that the camera is equipped with a
USB Type-C connector, you will need to supply a cable with a USB
Type-A connector for connection to the camera adapter.
Apple Lightning to
Third-party USB cable USB Camera Adapter
Network/USB Features and Settings

Type-C connector (male) Use an Apple Lightning to

USB Camera Adapter

Type-A connector (male)

1 Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for USB POWER

SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB setting menu.
8 2 Select USB CARD READER for CONNECTION MODE.

3 Connect the camera and smartphone using a USB cable.

Launch the Photos app to import photos and movies to your
smartphone.
O • A Type-C to Type-C USB cable is required for connection to iPad and
other devices equipped with USB Type-C connectors.
• The desired results cannot be achieved with a USB Type-C–to–
Lightning cable. Use a camera adapter.

254
 Connecting to Smartphones (USB)

Connecting the Camera and Computer

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for
USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Select USB CARD READER for CONNECTION MODE.

3 Turn the camera off.
4 Turn the computer on.
5 Connect a USB cable.

Network/USB Features and Settings

USB connector (Type-C)

O The USB cable must be no more than 1 m (3.3 ft.) long and be 8
suitable for data transfer.

6 Turn the camera on.

7 Copy pictures to your computer.

• Mac OS X/OS X/macOS: Pictures can be copied to your computer
using Image Capture (supplied with your computer) or oth-
er software. Use a card reader to copy files over 4 GB in size.
• Windows: Pictures can be copied to your computer using
apps supplied with the operating system.

255
 Connecting to Smartphones (USB)

O • Turn the camera off before disconnecting the USB cable.

• When connecting USB cables, be sure the connectors are fully in-
serted in the correct orientation. Connect the camera directly to the
computer; do not use a USB hub or keyboard.
• Loss of power during transfer could result in loss of data or damage to
the memory card. Insert a fresh or fully-charged battery before con-
necting the camera.
• If a memory card containing a large number of images is inserted,
there may be a delay before the software starts and you may be un-
able to import or save images. Use a memory card reader to transfer
pictures.
• Make sure that the indicator lamp is off or lit green before turning
the camera off.
• Do not disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in progress. Failure
Network/USB Features and Settings

to observe this precaution could result in loss of data or damage to

the memory card.
• Disconnect the camera before inserting or removing memory cards.
• In some cases, it may not be possible to access pictures saved to a
network server using the software in the same way as on a stand-
alone computer.
• Do not immediately remove the camera from the system or dis-
connect the USB cable once the message stating that copying is in
progress clears from the computer display. If the number of images
copied is very large, data transfer may continue after the message has
ceased to be displayed.
8 • The user bears all applicable fees charged by the phone company or
Internet service provider when using services that require an Internet
connection.

256
 Using the Camera as a Webcam
The camera can be connected to a computer for use as a
webcam.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for

USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Select USB WEBCAM for CONNECTION MODE.

3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).
4 Select the camera in the app where it will be used as a web-

Network/USB Features and Settings

cam.

257
 instax SHARE Printers
Print pictures from your digital camera to instax SHARE
printers.

Establishing a Connection
Select instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu and enter the instax SHARE printer name (SSID) and
password.

The Printer Name (SSID) and Password

The printer name (SSID) can be found on the
bottom of the printer; the default password is
Network/USB Features and Settings

“1111”. If you have already chosen a different

password to print from a smartphone, enter
that password instead.

258
 instax SHARE Printers

Printing Pictures
1 Turn the printer on.
2 Select C PLAY BACK MENU > instax PRINTER PRINT

PRINTER PRINT. The camera will con- instax-12345678

nect to the printer. CONNECTING
FUJIFILM-CAMERA-1234

CANCEL

3 Use the selector to display the pic- PRINTER PRINT

100-0020
ture you want to print, then press
MENU/OK.

Network/USB Features and Settings

SET CANCEL
instax-12345678

N • Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be printed.

• The area printed is smaller than the area visible in the LCD
monitor.
• The displays may vary depending on the printer connected.
4 The picture will be sent to the printer and printing will start.

259
 Tethered Photography
Computers connected via USB or wireless LAN can be used
to control the camera and take photographs remotely or to
download pictures from the camera for storage.

Tethered Photography via USB

Connect the camera to a computer via USB for tethered photog-
raphy.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for

USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.
Network/USB Features and Settings

2 Select USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO or USB TETHER

SHOOTING FIXED for CONNECTION MODE.
O • If USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO is selected, tethered pho-
tography will be enabled automatically when the computer to
which the camera is connected is turned on. When the com-
puter is off or not connected, tethered photography will be sus-
pended and pictures will be saved to the camera memory card.
• If the camera is disconnected from the computer while USB
TETHER SHOOTING FIXED is selected, it will continue to func-
tion in tethered mode and no pictures will be recorded.

8 3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).

260
 Tethered Photography

4 Take pictures via tethered photography.

Use software such as “Adobe Lightroom Classic + FUJIFILM
Tether Shooting Plug-in”, “FUJIFILM X Acquire”, or “Capture
One”.
N • To take pictures when using X Acquire, use the shutter button on the
camera.
• For more information on tethered photography, visit the website be-
low.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/
• Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

Tethered Photography via Wireless LAN

Network/USB Features and Settings

Connect the camera to a computer via wireless LAN for tethered
photography.

1 Connect the camera to a wireless LAN using NETWORK

SETTING in the network/USB setting menu.

2 Select WIRELESS TETHER SHOOTING FIXED for CONNECTION

MODE.

3 Take pictures via tethered photography.

Use software such as “Adobe Lightroom Classic  + FUJIFILM
Tether Shooting Plug-in” or “FUJIFILM X Acquire”.
8
N • To take pictures when using X Acquire, use the shutter button on the
camera.
• For more information on tethered photography, visit the website be-
low.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/en/tether/
• Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

261
 RAW Processing
Using X RAW STUDIO, you can harness the power of the
camera’s image processing engine when processing RAW
pictures on a computer.

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for

USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for CONNECTION

MODE.
3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn
the camera on (P 255).
Network/USB Features and Settings

4 Launch X RAW STUDIO.

RAW processing can be performed using X RAW STUDIO.
N Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

262
 Saving and Loading Settings
Camera settings can be saved to or loaded from computers
using FUJIFILM X Acquire.

Saving and Loading Settings Using a Computer

1 Select either AUTO or POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON for

USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING in the network/USB
setting menu.

2 Select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP RESTORE for CONNECTION

MODE.
3 Connect the camera to the computer via USB and then turn

Network/USB Features and Settings

the camera on (P 255).
4 Launch FUJIFILM X Acquire.
Camera settings can be saved or loaded using FUJIFILM X
Acquire.
N Visit the website below for information on the software used.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/

263
 Network/USB Setting Menus
Adjust camera network and USB settings.
To access network/USB settings from NETWORK/USB SETTING
Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
the shooting or playback display, press AIRPLANE MODE
NETWORK SETTING
MENU/OK and select the I (network/USB PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING
CONNECTION MODE
setting) tab. USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
INFORMATION
RESET WIRELESS SETTING
EXIT

Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING
Adjust Bluetooth-related settings as well as a variety of smart-
phone-related settings.
Network/USB Features and Settings

N Be sure your smartphone or tablet is running the latest version of the

smartphone app.

PAIRING REGISTRATION
Pair the camera with a smartphone or tablet to which the smart-
phone app has been installed.

SELECT PAIRING DESTINATION

Choose a connection from a list of devices with which the cam-
era has been paired using PAIRING REGISTRATION. Select NO
CONNECTION to exit without connecting.
8
DELETE PAIRING REG.
Delete existing pairing information for a smartphone or tablet.
N The selected device will be removed from the pairing list.

264
 Network/USB Setting Menus

Bluetooth DEVICE LIST

List the devices with which the camera is paired (other than the
smartphone) or end pairing with selected devices.

Bluetooth ON/OFF
If ON is selected, the camera will automatically connect with
paired smartphones or tablets running the smartphone app.
Options
ON OFF

AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER

Select ON to upload pictures automatically as they are taken.

Network/USB Features and Settings

Options
ON OFF

SMARTPHONE LOCATION SYNC.

Select ON to enable ongoing download of location data from
paired smartphones or tablets.
Options
ON OFF

O Location data will only be downloaded while the smartphone app is 8

running. Download will be interrupted if pairing is ended. The camera
location data icon will be displayed in red if location data have not
been updated for over 30 minutes.

NAME
Choose a name (NAME) to identify the camera on the wireless
network (the camera is assigned a unique name by default).

265
 IMAGE TRANSFER WHILE POWER OFF
If ON is selected, the camera will continue to upload pictures to
paired smartphones or tablets even while off.
Options
ON OFF

RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE

Select ON (recommended) to enable compression, reducing file
size for upload.
Options
ON OFF
Network/USB Features and Settings

N • The pictures on the camera memory card are not affected.

• Compression is used only for pictures taken at sizes of L and M.
WIRELESS COM. FREQUENCY SETTING
Choose the band for wireless LAN connections.
Options
2.4GHz (IEEE802.11 b/g/n) 5GHz (IEEE802.11 a/n/ac)

O • Some countries and regions prohibit outdoor use of certain channels

in the 5 GHz band. Check whether use of the 5.2 GHz (W52) band is
8 permitted before selecting the 5 GHz option.
• The options available vary with the country or region of sale.
SELECT FILE TYPE
Choose the format or formats used for upload. Pictures can be
uploaded in JPEG format and/or HEIF.

266
 Network/USB Setting Menus

AIRPLANE MODE
Select ON to disable the camera’s wireless LAN and Bluetooth
features.
Options
ON OFF

NETWORK SETTING
Adjust settings for connection to wireless networks.
Option Description
• SIMPLE SETUP: Connect to an access point using simple
settings.
• MANUAL SETUP: Manually adjust settings for connec-

Network/USB Features and Settings

ACCESS POINT
SETTING tion to a wireless network. Choose the network from a list
(SELECT FROM NETWORK LIST) or enter the name manu-
ally (ENTER SSID).
• AUTO: The IP address is assigned automatically.
IP ADDRESS • MANUAL: Assign an IP address manually. Manually choose
SETTING the IP address (IP ADDRESS), subnet mask (SUBNET
MASK), and gateway address (GATEWAY ADDRESS).

instax PRINTER CONNECTION SETTING

Adjust settings for connection to optional Fujifilm instax SHARE
printers (P 258).
8

267
 CONNECTION MODE
Adjust settings for connection to external devices.
Option Description
Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automatically
enables data transfer mode, allowing data to be copied to
USB CARD READER
the computer. The camera functions normally when not con-
nected.
Connect the camera to a computer via USB for use as a
USB WEBCAM
webcam.
The camera can be controlled from computers, gimbals,
drones, or other devices connected via USB. The camera au-
tomatically enters “tethered shooting” (i.e., remote-control)
Network/USB Features and Settings

mode when the external device is turned on and returns to

normal operation when the external device turned off or dis-
connected.
• Photographs can be taken remotely and automatically
USB TETHER downloaded to computers running Capture One, Adobe®
SHOOTING AUTO Photoshop® Lightroom® + Tether Plugin, FUJIFILM X
Acquire, or FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner. FUJIFILM X
Acquire can also be used to save and load camera settings.
• Remote photography and movie recording are available
when the camera is connected to a compatible device
such as a gimbal or drone. Use camera controls to switch
between still photography and movie recording. The fea-
8 tures available vary with the device connected.

268
 Network/USB Setting Menus

Option Description
As for USB TETHER SHOOTING AUTO, except that the
camera remains in “tethered shooting” (remote-control)
mode when the external device is off or not connected, al-
USB TETHER
lowing the device to resume control when the connection
SHOOTING FIXED
is re-established after an accidental disconnection or other
disruption. At default settings, pictures are not recorded to
the memory card.
Choose this option for wireless remote photography. Select
WIRELESS TETHER
an access point using NETWORK SETTING in the network/
SHOOTING FIXED
USB setting menu.
Connecting the camera to a computer via USB automatical-
ly enables USB RAW conversion/backup restore mode. The

Network/USB Features and Settings

camera functions normally when not connected.
USB RAW CONV./ •
USB RAW CONV. (requires FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO): Use the cam-
era’s image processing engine to rapidly convert RAW files
BACKUP RESTORE
to other formats while maintaining image quality.
• BACKUP RESTORE (requires FUJIFILM X Acquire): Save and load
camera settings. Reconfigure the camera in an instant or
share settings with other cameras of the same type.

O D POWER MANAGEMENT > AUTO POWER OFF settings also apply

during tethered shooting. To prevent the camera turning off automat-
ically, select OFF for AUTO POWER OFF.

N For information on compatible computer software, see “Software for 8

Use with Your Camera” (P 359).

269
 Network/USB Setting Menus

USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING

Choose whether USB connections to computers, smartphones,
or other devices are used for power delivery or data transfer.
Option Description
The camera switches between power delivery and data trans-
AUTO
fer automatically.
POWER SUPPLY ON/ The camera draws power from the connected device, reducing
COMM OFF the drain on the battery. Data transfer is disabled.
POWER SUPPLY The camera can exchange data with, but not draw power from,
OFF/COMM ON the connected device.

O The camera cannot draw power from Lightning connections or from

Network/USB Features and Settings

devices that do not supply power. Select POWER SUPPLY OFF/COMM

ON before connecting the camera to such devices. The connection
may not be available for data transfer or the like when POWER SUPPLY
ON/COMM OFF is selected.

N Regardless of the option selected, the battery will charge while the
camera is off.

INFORMATION
View the camera’s MAC, Bluetooth, and wireless network IP ad-
dresses.
8 RESET WIRELESS SETTING
Restore wireless settings to their default values.

270
The Setup Menus

271
 USER SETTING
Adjust basic camera settings.
To access basic camera settings, press USER SETTING
FORMAT
MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, and bAREA SETTING
DATE/TIME
TIME DIFFERENCE
choose USER SETTING. a
x MY MENU SETTING
F MY MENU SETTING
SENSOR CLEANING
EXIT

FORMAT
To format a memory card:

1 Select D USER SETTING > FORMAT in the D (SET UP) tab.

2 Highlight the slot containing the card you wish to format and
press MENU/OK.

3 A confirmation dialog will be dis- FORMAT

FORMAT CARD IN SLOT 1, OK?

played. To format the memory card, ERASE ALL DATA

highlight OK and press MENU/OK.

OK

N To exit without formatting the memory CANCEL

The Setup Menus

card, select CANCEL or press DISP/BACK.

O • All data—including protected pictures—will be deleted from the

memory card. Be sure important files have been copied to a comput-
er or other storage device.
• Do not open the battery-chamber cover during formatting.
9 N The format menu can also be displayed by pressing the center of the
rear command dial while pressing and holding the b button.

272
 USER SETTING

b AREA SETTING
Adjust settings for your current time zone.

AREA SETTING
Choose your time zone from a map.

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS
Turn daylight saving time on or off.
Option Description
ON Daylight saving time on.
OFF Daylight saving time off.

DATE/TIME
To set the camera clock:

1 Select D USER SETTING > DATE/TIME in the D (SET UP) tab.

2 Press the selector left or right to highlight the year, month,

day, hour, or minute and press up or down to change. To
change the order in which the year, month, and day are dis-

The Setup Menus

played, highlight the date format and press the selector up
or down.

3 Press MENU/OK to set the clock.

273
 TIME DIFFERENCE
Switch the camera clock instantly from your home time zone to
the local time at your destination when traveling. To specify the
difference between your local and home time zone:
O Use b AREA SETTING to choose your home time zone before select-
ing a local time zone using g LOCAL.

1 Highlight g LOCAL and press MENU/OK.

2 Use the selector to choose the local time zone. Press MENU/OK
when settings are complete.
N Select ON to enable daylight saving time.
To set the camera clock to local time, highlight g LOCAL and
press MENU/OK. To set the clock to the time in your home time
zone, select h HOME.
Options
g LOCAL h HOME

N If g LOCAL is selected, g will be displayed in yellow for about three

The Setup Menus

seconds when the camera is turned on.

274
 USER SETTING

Qa
Choose a language.

x MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized cus-
tom menu of frequently-used photo menu options (P 313).

F MY MENU SETTING
Edit the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab, a personalized cus-
tom menu of frequently-used movie menu options (P 313).

The Setup Menus

275
 SENSOR CLEANING
Remove dust from the camera image sensor.
Option Description
OK Clean the sensor immediately.
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera is
WHEN SWITCHED ON
turned on.
Sensor cleaning will be performed when the camera turns
WHEN SWITCHED OFF off (sensor cleaning is not however performed if the cam-
era turns off in playback mode).

N Dust that cannot be removed using sensor cleaning can be removed

using a blower (P 374).

BATTERY AGE
Check battery age. Age is expressed as a BATTERY AGE

number between 0 and 4. The higher the

number, the older the battery.
The Setup Menus

N The older the battery, the faster it loses its charge. We recommend that
batteries be replaced as they wear out.

276
 USER SETTING

RESET
Reset shooting or setup menu options to default values.

1 Highlight the desired option and press MENU/OK.

Option Description
Reset all photo menu settings other than custom white
STILL MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using
x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
Reset all movie menu settings other than custom white
MOVIE MENU RESET balance and custom settings banks created using
F EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING to default values.
Reset all setup menu settings other than DATE/TIME,
SET-UP RESET b AREA SETTING, TIME DIFFERENCE, and
COPYRIGHT INFO to default values.
Reset all settings other than custom white balance to
INITIALIZE
default values.

2 A confirmation dialog will be displayed; highlight OK and

press MENU/OK.

REGULATORY

The Setup Menus

To view electronic copies of the product model number, and
other certificates, select D USER SETTING > REGULATORY in the
setup menu.

277
 SOUND SETTING
Make changes to camera sounds.
To access sound settings, press MENU/OK, SOUND SETTING
AF BEEP VOL.
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.
OPERATION VOL.
SOUND SET-UP. FREC START/STOP VOLUME
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
ttELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
sELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME
sELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
EXIT

AF BEEP VOL.
Choose the volume of the beep that sounds when the camera
focuses. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)

SELF-TIMER BEEP VOL.

Choose the volume of the beep that sounds while the self-timer
is active. The beep can be muted by selecting eOFF.
Options
The Setup Menus

b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)

278
 SOUND SETTING

OPERATION VOL.
Adjust the volume of the sounds produced when camera con-
trols are operated. Choose eOFF to disable control sounds.
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)

F REC START/STOP VOLUME

Choose the volume at the start and end of movie recording.
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)

tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME

Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the mechanical or
electronic front-curtain shutter.
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)

The Setup Menus

279
 tt ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND
Choose the sound made by the mechanical or electronic
front-curtain shutter.
Options
i SOUND 1 j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3

s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER VOLUME

Adjust the volume of the sounds produced by the electronic
shutter. Choose eOFF to disable the shutter sound.
Options
b (high) c (medium) d (low) eOFF (mute)

s ELECTRONIC SHUTTER SOUND

Choose the sound made by the electronic shutter.
Options
i SOUND 1 j SOUND 2 k SOUND 3
The Setup Menus

280
 SOUND SETTING

PLAYBACK VOLUME
Adjust the volume for movie playback.
Options
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK

Adjust audio settings for use when viewing 4ch movies.
Option Description
The camera plays audio recorded via external micro-
XLR
phones connected via the XLR microphone adapter.
The camera plays audio recorded via the camera’s built-in
CAMERA microphone or external microphones connected via the
microphone jack.

N You can also switch sources while viewing the playback display by
pressing the center of the focus stick (focus lever).

The Setup Menus

281
 SCREEN SETTING
Make changes to display settings.
To access display settings, press MENU/OK, SCREEN SETTING
VIEW MODE SETTING
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose EVF BRIGHTNESS
EVF COLOR
SCREEN SET-UP. EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT
LCD BRIGHTNESS
LCD COLOR
LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT
IMAGE DISP.
EXIT

VIEW MODE SETTING

Adjust settings for eye sensor, EVF (electronic viewfinder), or LCD
monitor view modes (P 16).

EVF BRIGHTNESS
Adjust the brightness of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
Option Description
The camera automatically adjusts brightness around a selected
AUTO
level in response to changes in ambient lighting conditions.
Adjust brightness manually; choose from options between −7
MANUAL
and +5.
The Setup Menus

EVF COLOR
Adjust the saturation of the display in the electronic viewfinder.
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5
9

282
 SCREEN SETTING

EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the color of the display in the electronic viewfinder.

1 Adjust colors using the selector. EVF COLOR ADJUSTMENT

SET CANCEL

2 Press MENU/OK.

The Setup Menus

283
 LCD BRIGHTNESS
Adjust monitor brightness.
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5

LCD COLOR
Adjust monitor saturation.
Options
−5 −4 −3 −2 −1 0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5

LCD COLOR ADJUSTMENT

Adjust the color of the display in the LCD monitor.

1 Adjust colors using the selector.

2 Press MENU/OK.
The Setup Menus

284
 SCREEN SETTING

IMAGE DISP.
Choose how long images are displayed after shooting.
Option Description
Pictures are displayed until the MENU/OK button is pressed or the
shutter button is pressed halfway. To zoom in on the active focus
CONTINUOUS
point, press the center of the rear command dial; press again to
cancel zoom.
1.5 SEC Pictures are displayed for the selected time or until the shutter
0.5 SEC button is pressed halfway.
OFF Pictures are not displayed after shooting.

N • Colors may differ slightly from those in the final image.

• “Noise” mottling may be visible at high sensitivities.
AUTOROTATE DISPLAYS
Choose whether the indicators in the viewfinder and LCD monitor
rotate to match camera orientation.
Options
ON OFF

The Setup Menus

285
 PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
Choose whether to enable exposure and/or white balance preview
in manual exposure mode.
Option Description
PREVIEW EXP./WB Enable exposure and white balance preview.
Preview white balance only. Choose this option in situations in
PREVIEW WB which exposure is likely to change during shooting, as may be
the case when you use a flash during daylight.
Disable exposure and white balance preview. Choose this op-
tion in situations in which both exposure and white balance
OFF
are likely to change during shooting, as may be the case when
you use a flash with an incandescent monitoring lamp.

NATURAL LIVE VIEW

Choose whether the effects of film simulation, white balance,
and other settings are visible in the monitor.
Option Description
The effects of camera settings are not visible in the monitor,
but shadows in low-contrast, back-lit scenes and other hard-
ON to-see subjects more visible. Colors and tone will differ from
The Setup Menus

those in the final picture. The display will however be adjusted

to show the effects of monochrome and sepia settings.
The effects of film simulation, white balance, and other settings
OFF
can be previewed in the monitor.

286
 SCREEN SETTING

F-Log VIEW ASSIST

Select ON to display a tone-corrected preview (equivalent to
BT.709) when recording or viewing F-log movies.
Options
ON OFF

ELECTRONIC LEVEL SETTING

Adjust settings for use when taking pictures using the virtual
horizon display (P 23).

The Setup Menus

287
 FRAMING GUIDELINE
Choose a framing grid for shooting mode.
Option
F GRID 9 G GRID 24 H HD FRAMING
Display

P P P

For “rule of thirds” compo- A six-by-four grid. Frame HD pictures in the

sition. crop shown by the lines at
the top and bottom of the
display.

N Framing guides are not shown at default settings but can be displayed
using D SCREEN SET-UP > DISP. CUSTOM SETTING (P 21).
The Setup Menus

288
 SCREEN SETTING

AUTOROTATE PB
Choose ON to automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation)
pictures during playback.
Options
ON OFF

FOCUS SCALE UNITS

Choose the units used for the focus distance indicator.
Options
METERS FEET

APERTURE UNIT FOR CINEMA LENS

Choose whether the camera displays aperture as a T-number
(used for movie camera lenses) or an f/-number (used for still
camera lenses) when an optional FUJINON MKX-series lens is
attached. For information on using cinema lenses, see the docu-
mentation provided with the lens.
Option Description

The Setup Menus

A measure of lens aperture commonly used by cinematogra-
T NUMBER phers. Lens transmittance is taken into account to better cal-
culate exposure.
A measure of lens aperture commonly used by photographers.
Lens transmittance is assumed to be 100%, meaning that the
F NUMBER
same aperture may produce different exposures depending on
the lens.
9

289
 DUAL DISPLAY SETTING
Choose the content of the two windows in the dual display.
Option Description
The right (small) window shows a close-up of the focus area,
R:FOCUS L:FRAME
while the left (large) window shows the entire frame.
The right (small) window shows the entire frame, while the left
R:FRAME L:FOCUS
(large) window shows a close-up of the focus area.

DISP. CUSTOM SETTING

Choose the items shown in the standard indicator display
(P 21).
The Setup Menus

290
 SCREEN SETTING

LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF)

Select ON to display large indicators in the electronic viewfind-
er. The indicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN
SET-UP > LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.

OFF ON

O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE

INDICATORS MODE(EVF) (P 13).

N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the

button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)
and off (OFF) (P 321).

LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD)

Select ON to display large indicators in the LCD monitor. The in-

The Setup Menus

dicators displayed can be selected using D SCREEN SET-UP  >
LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING.

9
OFF ON

O Some icons are not displayed when ON is selected for LARGE

INDICATORS MODE(LCD) (P 15).

N If LARGE INDICATORS MODE is assigned to a function button, the

button can be used to toggle LARGE INDICATORS MODE on (ON)
and off (OFF) (P 321).

291
 LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Choose the indicators displayed when LARGE INDICATORS DISP. SETTING
Expo. DISP.
ON is selected for D SCREEN SET-UP > Scale
L1
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(EVF) or L2
L3
LARGE INDICATORS MODE(LCD). L4
R1
R2

Option Description
Choose the items listed at the bottom of the display.
A Expo. DISP. Selected items are indicated by check marks (R); to
deselect, highlight the check marks and press MENU/OK.
B d Scale Select ON to display the exposure indicator.
Choose up to four large icons for display on the left side
C L1, L2, L3, L4
of the screen.
Choose up to four large icons for display on the right
D R1, R2, R3, R4
side of the screen.

INFORMATION CONTRAST ADJ.

Adjust display contrast.
The Setup Menus

Option Description
HIGH CONTRAST High contrast.
STANDARD Normal contrast.
LOW CONTRAST Low contrast.
DARK AMBIENT LIGHTING Contrast adjusted for dim ambient lighting.

292
 SCREEN SETTING

LOCATION INFO
Select ON to display location info downloaded from a smart-
phone.
Options
ON OFF

x Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is
displayed during still photography.
Options
TRANSPARENT BLACK

F Q MENU BACKGROUND
Choose the background color used for the quick menu when it is
displayed during movie recording.
Options
TRANSPARENT BLACK

The Setup Menus

293
 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
Access options for camera controls.
To access control options, press MENU/OK, BUTTON/DIAL SETTING
FOCUS LEVER SETTING
select the D (SET UP) tab, and choose EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
BUTTON/DIAL SETTING. POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING
SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING
COMMAND DIAL SETTING
o S.S OPERATION
EXIT

FOCUS LEVER SETTING

Choose the functions performed by pressing the center of the
focus stick (focus lever) or by pressing the stick up, down, left, or
right.

PUSH
Option Description
OFF Pressing the center of the stick has no effect.
Press the center of the stick to choose the focus area size.
If g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING or SUBJECT
EDIT FOCUS AREA
DETECTION SETTING is on, you can instead position the
The Setup Menus

focus frame over the desired face, eye, animal, or object.

Press the center of the stick to zoom in on the active focus
ZOOM
area (P 90).
RESET TO CENTER Press the center of the stick to select the center focus area.

TILT o
9
Option Description
OFF Pressing the stick up, down, left, or right has no effect.
DIRECT AF POINT
Choose the focus area without leaving the shooting display.
SELECTION
Press the stick up, down, left, or right to view a focus-area
EDIT FOCUS AREA
display and choose the focus area.

294
 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU

Choose the items displayed in the quick menu during still pho-
tography (P 315).

F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU

Choose the items displayed in the quick menu when filming
movies (P 315).

FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING

Choose the roles played by the function buttons (P 321).

POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING

Choose the roles played by the function buttons available on
some power zoom lenses (P 329).

SELECTOR BUTTON SETTING

Choose the roles played by the up, down, left, and right buttons
on the selector.
Option Description

The Setup Menus

Fn BUTTON The selector buttons serve as function buttons.
FOCUS AREA The selector buttons can be used to position the focus area.

N Selecting FOCUS AREA prevents you accessing the functions assigned

to the function buttons.

295
 COMMAND DIAL SETTING
Choose the roles played by the command dials.
Option Description
FRONT COMMAND Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)) or aper-
DIAL 1 ture (APERTURE) 1 to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1.
FRONT COMMAND Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), ap-
DIAL 2 erture (APERTURE) 1, exposure compensation (EXP.
COMPENSATION) 2, sensitivity (ISO) 3, or no role (NONE)
FRONT COMMAND to FRONT COMMAND DIAL 2 or FRONT COMMAND
DIAL 3 DIAL 3.
Assign shutter speed (S.S. (PROGRAM SHIFT)), ap-
REAR COMMAND erture (APERTURE) 1, exposure compensation (EXP.
DIAL COMPENSATION) 2, sensitivity (ISO) 3, or no role (NONE)
to the rear command dial.
1 Aperture set to A (auto) and lens equipped with aperture ring or COMMAND
selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE RING SETTING (A).
2 Exposure compensation dial rotated to C.
3 Sensitivity dial rotated to C.

N • COMMAND DIAL SETTING can also be accessed by pressing and

holding the center of the front command dial.
The Setup Menus

• You can also press the center of the front command dial to cycle
through settings in the order FRONT COMMAND DIAL 1, FRONT
COMMAND DIAL 2, and FRONT COMMAND DIAL 3.

296
 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

o S.S OPERATION
Select OFF to disable shutter-speed fine-tuning using the com-
mand dials.
Options
ON OFF

COMMAND DIAL DIRECTION

Choose the direction in which the command dials are rotated to
choose values. Settings for the front and rear command dials can
be adjusted separately.
Option Description
Rotate the dial right for higher values or to move to the next
- ––––– +
item.
+ ––––– - Rotate the dial left for higher values or to move to the next item.

The Setup Menus

297
 SHUTTER AF
Choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button is
pressed halfway.
Option Description
• ON: Focus locks when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
AF-S • OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter but-
ton is pressed halfway.
• ON: The camera focuses while the shutter button is pressed
halfway.
AF-C
• OFF: No focus operation is performed when the shutter but-
ton is pressed halfway.

SHUTTER AE
If ON is selected, exposure will lock while the shutter button is
pressed halfway. The setting for focus mode C (AF-C) can be ad-
justed separately from that for modes S (AF-S) and M (manual fo-
cus).
Options
ON OFF
The Setup Menus

N Select OFF to allow the camera to adjust exposure before each shot
taken in burst mode.

298
 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

SHOOT WITHOUT LENS

Choose ON to enable the shutter release when no lens is at-
tached.
Options
ON OFF

SHOOT WITHOUT CARD

Choose whether the shutter can be released without a memory
card inserted in the camera.
Option Description
When no memory card is inserted, the shutter can be released to
ON test camera function and the shooting and setup menus can be
displayed.
The shutter is disabled if no memory card is inserted, preventing
OFF
accidental loss of pictures taken without a memory card.

The Setup Menus

299
 LENS ZOOM/FOCUS SETTING
Adjust settings for compatible lenses with focus rings or power zoom.

FOCUS RING ROTATE

Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to in-
crease the focus distance.
Options
X CW (clockwise) Y CCW (counterclockwise)

FOCUS RING OPERATION

Choose how the camera adjusts focus in response to the move-
ment of the focus ring.
Option Description
NONLINEAR Focus is adjusted at the same rate as the ring is rotated.
Focus is adjusted linearly according to the amount the ring is rotated,
LINEAR
but the focusing speed is unaffected by the speed the ring is rotated.

F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (Fn)

Choose the rate at which the focus distance changes when adjust-
The Setup Menus

ed using function buttons during manual focus with compatible

power zoom lenses. The higher the number, the higher the rate.
Options
1(SLOW) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8(FAST)

CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (Fn)

9
Choose the rate at which compatible power zoom lenses can be
zoomed in or out using function buttons. The higher the number, the
higher the rate.
Options
1(SLOW) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8(FAST)

300
 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM/FOCUS (Fn) OPERATION

Choose whether the function buttons on compatible power
zoom lenses need only be pressed once to start and stop power
focus or power zoom.
Option Description
START/STOP The operation starts when the button is pressed and stops when
SWITCH it is pressed a second time.
ACTIVE WHILE The operation continues while the button is pressed and stops
PRESSING when the button is released.

ZOOM RING ROTATE

Choose whether to reverse the rotation of the zoom ring on com-
patible power zoom lenses.
Options
X CW (clockwise) Y CCW (counterclockwise)

ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING

Choose role played by the zoom/focus control ring on compati-
ble power zoom lenses.

The Setup Menus

Options
ZOOM FOCUS

301
 AE/AF-LOCK MODE
This option determines the behavior of the button to which
exposure and/or focus lock is assigned.
Option Description
AE&AF ON WHEN
Exposure and/or focus will lock while the button is pressed.
PRESSING
AE&AF ON/OFF Exposure and/or focus will lock when the button is pressed and re-
SWITCH main locked until it is pressed again.

AWB-LOCK MODE
Choose the behavior of function buttons assigned auto white balance
(AWB) lock. Auto white balance lock is used to lock white balance at
the value metered by the camera when WA WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO,
or AA AMBIENCE PRIORITY is selected for white balance.
Option Description
AWB ON WHEN
Auto white balance locks while the button is pressed.
PRESSING
AWB ON/OFF Press the button once to lock auto white balance and again to end
SWITCH the lock.
The Setup Menus

302
 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

APERTURE RING SETTING (A)

Choose whether the front command dial can be used to adjust
aperture when aperture is set to A (auto).
Option Description
AUTO The camera adjusts aperture automatically.
COMMAND Aperture can be adjusted using the front command dial.

APERTURE SETTING
Choose the method used to adjust aperture when using lenses
with no aperture rings.
Option Description
AUTO + Rotate the front command dial to choose the aperture. Rotate past
o MANUAL minimum aperture to choose A (auto).
Aperture is selected automatically; camera functions in exposure
AUTO
mode P (program AE) or S (shutter-priority AE).
Rotate the front command dial to choose the aperture; camera
MANUAL functions in exposure mode A (aperture-priority AE) or M (man-
ual).

a Fn1 BUTTON SETTING

The Setup Menus

Choose the role performed by the Fn1 button during playback.
Option Description
Pressing the button displays a dialog where pictures can be
selected for upload to a smartphone with which the camera
a SMARTPHONE
is paired (P 239). If the camera is not currently paired with
TRANSFER ORDER
a smartphone, Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING options 9
will be displayed instead (P 264).
r WIRELESS
The button can be used for wireless connections.
COMMUNICATION

303
 TOUCH SCREEN SETTING
Enable or disable touch-screen controls.

x TOUCH SCREEN SETTING

Option Description
ON The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during shooting.
OFF Touch controls disabled.

x DOUBLE TAP SETTING

Option Description
Tap the LCD monitor twice to zoom in on your subject during
ON
shooting.
OFF Touch zoom disabled.

c TOUCH FUNCTION
Option Description
ON Enable touch-function gestures.
OFF Disable touch-function gestures.
The Setup Menus

TOUCH ZOOM
Option Description
If the lens supports touch zoom, you can zoom in and out by
ON
touching the LCD monitor (P 30).
9 OFF Touch zoom disabled.

a TOUCH SCREEN SETTING

Option Description
ON The LCD monitor functions as a touch screen during playback.
OFF Touch controls disabled.

304
 BUTTON/DIAL SETTING

EVF TOUCH SCREEN AREA SETTINGS

Select the area of the LCD monitor used for touch controls while
the viewfinder is active. The area used for touch controls can be
selected from:
Option Description
6 All.
0 Right half.
2 Top right quarter.
4 Bottom right quarter.
1 Left half.
3 Top left quarter.
5 Bottom left quarter.
OFF Touch controls disabled.

LOCK
Lock selected controls to prevent unintended operation.
Option Description
Choose from the following:
• UNLOCK: Reset lock options.

The Setup Menus

LOCK SETTING •
ALL FUNCTION: Lock all controls in the FUNCTION
SELECTION list.
• SELECTED FUNCTION: Lock only the controls selected in
the FUNCTION SELECTION list.
FUNCTION Choose the controls locked when SELECTED FUNCTION is
SELECTION chosen for LOCK SETTING. 9

N The controls selected using SELECTED FUNCTION can be locked at any

time during shooting by pressing and holding MENU/OK. To unlock the
controls, press and hold the button again.

305
 POWER MANAGEMENT
Adjust power management settings.
To access power management settings, POWER MANAGEMENT

press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, AUTO POWER OFF
and choose POWER MANAGEMENT. PERFORMANCE
EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING
AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

EXIT

AUTO POWER OFF

Choose the length of time before the camera turns off automati-
cally when no operations are performed. Shorter times increase
battery life; if OFF is selected, the camera must be turned off
manually.
Options
5 MIN 2 MIN 1 MIN 30 SEC 15 SEC OFF

PERFORMANCE
Select BOOST to improve focus and viewfinder display perfor-
The Setup Menus

mance.
Option Description
Boost camera focus and viewfinder display performance.
BOOST
The battery drains faster than when is NORMAL selected.
Choose for standard focus and viewfinder display perfor-
NORMAL
mance and battery endurance.
9 Limit autofocus and viewfinder performance. This option
ECONOMY
offers better battery endurance than does NORMAL.

306
 POWER MANAGEMENT

EVF/LCD BOOST SETTING

Adjust the behavior of the EVF and LCD monitor when BOOST is
selected for PERFORMANCE.
Option Description
EVF/LCD LOW LIGHT Display brightness is adjusted to make subjects in shad-
PRIORITY ows easier to see. Motion blur may cause ghosting.
EVF/LCD RESOLUTION Display resolution is increased to make details easier to
PRIORITY see.
EVF FRAME RATE The refresh rate for the EVF is increased, smoothing mo-
PRIORITY (100P) tion.
The refresh rate for the EVF is increased beyond EVF
EVF FRAME RATE
FRAME RATE PRIORITY (100P) smoothing motion
PRIORITY (200P EQUIV.)
still further. The EVF may darken.

AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.

If its temperature rises beyond a certain point, the camera will first
display a message and then, if the temperature rise continues, auto-
matically end shooting and power down. Choose the temperature
at which the camera turns off automatically.

The Setup Menus

Option Description
The camera turns off automatically when its temperature
STANDARD
reaches the STANDARD value.
Shooting can continue at temperatures higher than
the STANDARD value, extending the time available to
record movies and the like. Because remaining in contact
HIGH with the camera at these high temperatures could result 9
in low-temperature burns, this option should only be
used after mounting the camera on a tripod or taking
other steps to avoid prolonged contact with the camera.

307
 SAVE DATA SETTING
Make changes to file management settings.
To access file management settings, SAVE DATA SETTING
FRAME NO.
press MENU/OK, select the D (SET UP) tab, EDIT FILE NAME
xCARD SLOT SETTING
and choose SAVE DATA SET-UP. SELECT SLOT(x SEQUENTIAL)
SELECT FOLDER
COPYRIGHT INFO
GEOTAGGING

EXIT

FRAME NO.
New pictures are stored in image files named Frame number
using a four-digit file number assigned by
adding one to the last file number used. The
file number is displayed during playback as Directory File
number number
shown. FRAME NO. controls whether file num-
bering is reset to 0001 when a new memory card is inserted or
the current memory card is formatted.
Option Description
Numbering continues from the last file number used or the first
CONTINUOUS available file number, whichever is higher. Choose this option to
The Setup Menus

reduce the number of pictures with duplicate file names.

Numbering is reset to 0001 after formatting or when a new
RENEW
memory card is inserted.

N • If the frame number reaches 999-9999, the shutter release will be

disabled. Turn the camera off and insert a formatted memory card
9 before resuming shooting.
• Selecting D USER SETTING  > RESET sets FRAME NO. to
CONTINUOUS but does not reset the file number.
• Frame numbers for pictures taken with other cameras may differ.

308
 SAVE DATA SETTING

EDIT FILE NAME

Change the file name prefix. sRGB images use a four-letter prefix
(default “DSCF”), Adobe RGB images a three-letter prefix (“DSF”)
preceded by an underscore.
Option Default prefix Sample file name
sRGB DSCF ABCD0001
AdobeRGB _DSF _ABC0001

x CARD SLOT SETTING

Choose the role played by the card in the second slot.
Option Description
The card in the second slot is used only when the card in the
SEQUENTIAL
first slot is full.
BACKUP Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card.
RAW pictures will be saved to the card in the first slot and JPEG
or HEIF pictures to the card in the second slot. This option only
SEPARATE
takes effect when FINE+RAW or NORMAL+RAW is selected
for H IMAGE QUALITY SETTING > IMAGE QUALITY.

SELECT SLOT(xSEQUENTIAL)

The Setup Menus

Choose the card that is recorded to first when SEQUENTIAL is
selected for x CARD SLOT SETTING.
Options
SLOT 1 SLOT 2

309
 SAVE DATA SETTING

SELECT FOLDER
Create folders and choose the folder used to store subsequent
pictures.
Option Description
To choose the folder in which subsequent pictures will be
SELECT FOLDER stored, press the selector up or down to highlight an exist-
ing folder and press MENU/OK.
Enter a five-character folder name. The new folder will be
CREATE FOLDER created with the next picture you take and subsequent
pictures will be stored in that folder.

COPYRIGHT INFO
Copyright information, in the form of Exif tags, can be added to
new images as they are taken. Changes to copyright information
are reflected only in images taken after the changes are made.
Option Description
DISP COPYRIGHT INFO View the current copyright information.
ENTER AUTHOR’S INFO Enter the creator’s name.
ENTER COPYRIGHT INFO Enter the name of the copyright holder.
Delete the current copyright information. This change applies
The Setup Menus

DELETE COPYRIGHT INFO only to images taken after this option is selected; copyright
information recorded with existing images is not affected.

GEOTAGGING
If ON is selected, location data downloaded from a smartphone
9 will be embedded in pictures as they are taken.
Options
ON OFF

310
Shortcuts

311
 Shortcut Options
Customize camera controls to suit your style or situation.
Frequently-used options can be added to the Q menu or a cus-
tom “my” menu or assigned to a function button or touch-func-
tion gesture for direct access:
Shortcut Option Description P
Add frequently-used options to this custom menu,
“My menu” which can be viewed by pressing MENU/OK and se- 313
lecting the E (“MY MENU”) tab.
The Q menu is displayed by pressing the Q button.
The Quick Menu Use the Q menu to view or change the options se- 315
lected for frequently-used menu items.
Use the function buttons for direct access to select-
The function buttons 321
ed features.
Use touch function button flick gestures (T-Fn1,
Touch-function
T-Fn2, T-Fn3, and T-Fn4) for direct access to selected 326
gestures
features.
Use the function buttons on the lens (if any) for di-
Lens function buttons 329
rect access to selected features.
Shortcuts

10

312
 MY MENU
Access a personalized menu of frequently-used options.
To display “my menu”, press MENU/OK in the MY MENU
SELF-TIMER
shooting display and select the E (MY INTERVAL TIMER SHOOTING
FILM SIMULATION
MENU) tab. GRAIN EFFECT
PHOTOMETRY
SHUTTER TYPE
IS MODE
gFACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING
EXIT

O The E tab is only available if options have been assigned to

MY MENU.

MY MENU SETTING
To choose the items listed in the E (MY MENU) tab:

1 In the setup menu, select D USER MY MENU SETTING

SETTING > x MY MENU SETTING or ADD ITEMS

F MY MENU SETTING. RANK ITEMS
REMOVE ITEMS

N To reorder items, select RANK ITEMS.

To delete items, select REMOVE ITEMS.

2 Press the selector up or down to MY MENU SETTING

IMAGE SIZE
highlight ADD ITEMS and press IMAGE QUALITY
RAW RECORDING
MENU/OK. Options that can be added SELECT JPEG/HEIF
FILM SIMULATION
to “my menu” are highlighted in blue. MONOCHROMATIC COLOR
GRAIN EFFECT Shortcuts
COLOR CHROME EFFECT
SELECT CANCEL

N Items currently in “my menu” are indicated by check marks.

10

313
 MY MENU

3 Choose a position for the item and SELECT ITEM LOCATION

1 IMAGE SIZE
press MENU/OK. The item will be added 2 IMAGE QUALITY

to “my menu”.

MOVE SAVE

4 Press MENU/OK to return to the edit display.

5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until all the desired items have been
added.
N “My menu” can contain up to 16 items.
Shortcuts

10

314
 The Quick Menu
Use the quick menu for quick access to selected options. To
view the quick menu, press the Q button.

The Quick Menu Display

The quick menu offers different options in photo and movie
modes. At default settings, it contains the following items:

Still photography

SELECT CUSTOM SETTING

APERTURE PRIORITY AE

SET LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

Default
A x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING * I HIGHLIGHT TONE
B AF MODE J SHADOW TONE
C DYNAMIC RANGE K COLOR Shortcuts

D WHITE BALANCE L SHARPNESS

E HIGH ISO NR M SELF-TIMER
g FACE/EYE DETECTION
F IMAGE SIZE N
SETTING
G IMAGE QUALITY O SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
10
H FILM SIMULATION P EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
* If no settings bank is currently selected for x SELECT CUSTOM SETTING, the shoot-
ing mode will be displayed instead.
The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B–P, which can be changed.
315
 Movie recording

SELECT CUSTOM SETTING

APERTURE PRIORITY AE

SET LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

Default
A F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING * E APERTURE (MOVIE OPTIMIZED
CONTROL oL)
B S.S. (MOVIE OPTIMIZED F ISO (MOVIE OPTIMIZED
CONTROL oL) CONTROL oL)
C MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ G MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
ASPECT RATIO
D F WHITE BALANCE H F WHITE BALANCE COLOR
TEMP. (WHEN k SELECTED)
* If no settings bank is currently selected for F SELECT CUSTOM SETTING, the shoot-
ing mode will be displayed instead.
Shortcuts

The quick menu shows the options currently selected for items
B–H, which can be changed.
10

316
 The Quick Menu

Viewing and Changing Settings

1 Press Q to display the quick menu
during shooting.

2 Use the selector to highlight items SELECT CUSTOM SETTING

APERTURE PRIORITY AE

and rotate the rear command dial to

change.

SET LONG PRESS EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM

N To jump to the x EDIT/SAVE CUSTOM SETTING or F EDIT/

SAVE CUSTOM SETTING menu, press and hold the Q button
when the quick menu is displayed.

3 Press Q to exit when settings are complete.

Shortcuts
N • The quick menu can also be edited using touch controls.
• Using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING, you
can assign the Q  button roles normally reserved for the function
buttons or assign the Q  button’s default role to a function button
(P 321). 10
• To disable the Q (quick menu) button, select NONE for D BUTTON/
DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING > Q BUTTON SETTING.

317
 Editing the Quick Menu
To choose the items displayed in the quick menu:

1 Press and hold the Q button during

shooting.

N The camera displays the photo quick menu during still photogra-
phy and the movie quick menu when in movie mode.

2 The current quick menu will be displayed; use the selector

to highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK.

3 Highlight the item you wish to change and press MENU/OK.

The following can be assigned to the quick menu.
N The quick menus can also be edited using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >
x EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU or F EDIT/SAVE QUICK MENU.
Shortcuts

10

318
 The Quick Menu

Available Items (Still Photography)

Choose from:
• IMAGE SIZE • SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING
• IMAGE QUALITY • MF ASSIST
• FILM SIMULATION • TOUCH SCREEN MODE
• GRAIN EFFECT • SELF-TIMER
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT • PHOTOMETRY
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE • SHUTTER TYPE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT • FLICKER REDUCTION
• DYNAMIC RANGE • FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• D RANGE PRIORITY • FLASH COMPENSATION
• WHITE BALANCE • MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT
• WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP. RATIO
(WHEN k SELECTED) • MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE
• HIGHLIGHT TONE • BIT RATE
• SHADOW TONE • HIGH SPEED REC
• COLOR • F IS MODE
• SHARPNESS • F IS MODE BOOST
• CLARITY • INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
• HIGH ISO NR ADJUSTMENT
• AF MODE • EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS • EVF/LCD COLOR
• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING • NONE
N To disable the function button, choose NONE.
Shortcuts

10

319
 The Quick Menu

Available Items (Movies)

• FILM SIMULATION • BIT RATE
• DYNAMIC RANGE • HIGH SPEED REC
• F WHITE BALANCE • F SELF-TIMER
• F WHITE BALANCE COLOR TEMP. • MOVIE AF MODE
(WHEN k SELECTED) • FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• HIGHLIGHT TONE • F IS MODE
• SHADOW TONE • F IS MODE BOOST
• COLOR • S.S.
• SHARPNESS (MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)
• HIGH ISO NR • APERTURE
• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING (MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)
• SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING • ISO
• MF ASSIST (MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL)
• TOUCH SCREEN MODE • INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
• PHOTOMETRY ADJUSTMENT
• MOVIE MODE RESOLUTION/ASPECT • EVF/LCD BRIGHTNESS
RATIO • EVF/LCD COLOR
• MOVIE MODE FRAME RATE • NONE
N To disable the function button, choose NONE.
Shortcuts

10

320
 Function Controls
Assign a role to each function button or touch-function
gesture for quick access to the selected feature.

The Function Buttons

Assign a role to the function buttons for quick access to the se-
lected feature.

Function Button Defaults

The default assignments are:
Back-of-Camera Function Buttons

Shortcuts

Function buttons Default

A AFON button AF-ON
B Center of rear command dial FOCUS CHECK
C Q (quick menu) button QUICK MENU 10
D AEL (exposure lock) button AE LOCK ONLY

321
 Front-of-Camera Function Buttons

Function buttons Default

A VIEW MODE button VIEW MODE SETTING
B Fn1 button FACE DETECTION ON/OFF
C Fn2 button DRIVE SETTING
The Selector

Function buttons Default

Shortcuts

A Fn3 button PHOTOMETRY

B Fn5 button WHITE BALANCE
C Fn6 button PERFORMANCE
10 D Fn4 button FILM SIMULATION

322
 Function Controls

Assigning Roles to the Function Buttons

Pressing and holding the DISP/BACK button displays a dialog where
you can choose the roles assigned to the function buttons.

1 Press and hold the DISP/BACK button

until a control selection menu is dis-
played.

N You can also assign roles to function buttons using D BUTTON/

DIAL SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING.

2 Highlight the desired control and press MENU/OK.

3 Highlight any of the following options and press MENU/OK to

assign it to the selected control.

Shortcuts

10

323
 Roles That Can Be Assigned to the Function Buttons
Choose from:
• IMAGE SIZE • DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
• IMAGE QUALITY • MULTI EXPOSURE
• RAW • WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
• FILM SIMULATION • FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• GRAIN EFFECT • TTL-LOCK
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT • MODELING FLASH
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE • MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT • HIGH SPEED REC
• DYNAMIC RANGE • F SELF-TIMER
• D RANGE PRIORITY • FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• WHITE BALANCE • F IS MODE BOOST
• CLARITY • ZEBRA SETTING
• SELECT CUSTOM SETTING • INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING ADJUSTMENT
• FOCUS AREA • 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
• FOCUS CHECK • MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
• AF MODE • VIEW MODE SETTING
• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS • PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF • PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH • NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF • HISTOGRAM
• AF RANGE LIMITER • ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
• FOCUS CHECK LOCK • LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• DRIVE SETTING • F-Log VIEW ASSIST
• SPORTS FINDER MODE • ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
Shortcuts

• PRE-SHOT sJ • CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)

• SELF-TIMER • CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)
• PHOTOMETRY • F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (N)
10 • SHUTTER TYPE • F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (F)
• FLICKER REDUCTION • AE LOCK ONLY
• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING • AF LOCK ONLY
• ISO AUTO SETTING • AE/AF LOCK
• IS MODE

324
 Function Controls

• AF-ON • AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER

• AWB LOCK ONLY • Bluetooth ON/OFF
• APERTURE SETTING • QUICK MENU
• LOCK SETTING • PLAYBACK
• PERFORMANCE • NONE
N • The selector cannot be assigned more than one role at a time.
• To disable the function button, choose NONE.
AF-ON
Controls to which AF-ON is assigned can be used for autofocus.

MODELING FLASH
If MODELING FLASH is selected when a compatible shoe-mount-
ed flash unit is attached, you can press the control to test-fire the
flash and check for shadows and the like (modeling flash).

TTL-LOCK
If TTL-LOCK is selected, you can press the control to lock flash
output according to the option selected for F FLASH SETTING >
TTL-LOCK MODE (P 181).

RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING

Controls to which RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING has been as-
signed can be pressed to temporarily recall the settings saved to Shortcuts
C1 (CUSTOM 1). Pressing the button a second time restores the
previous settings.

10

325
 Touch-Function Gestures
Assign roles to touch-function gestures (T-Fn1, T-Fn2, T-Fn3, or T-Fn4)
for quick access to selected features.
N Touch-function gestures are disabled by default. To enable touch-func-
tion gestures, select ON for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING  > TOUCH
SCREEN SETTING > c TOUCH FUNCTION.

Touch-Function Gesture Defaults

The default assignments for the different gestures are:

Touch-Function Gestures Default

A T-Fn1 (flick up) HISTOGRAM
B T-Fn2 (flick left) PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
C T-Fn3 (flick right) LARGE INDICATORS MODE
Shortcuts

D T-Fn4 (flick down) ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH

10

326
 Function Controls

Assigning Roles to Touch Function Gestures

Pressing and holding the DISP/BACK button displays a dialog where
you can choose the roles assigned to touch function gestures.

1 Press and hold the DISP/BACK button

until a control selection menu is dis-
played.

N Button assignments can also be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL

SETTING > FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING.

2 Highlight a touch function gesture and press MENU/OK.

3 Highlight any of the following options and press MENU/OK to

assign it to the selected control.

Shortcuts

10

327
 Roles That Can Be Assigned to Touch Function Gestures
Choose from:
• IMAGE SIZE • DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
• IMAGE QUALITY • MULTI EXPOSURE
• RAW • WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
• FILM SIMULATION • FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• GRAIN EFFECT • TTL-LOCK
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT • MODELING FLASH
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE • HIGH SPEED REC
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT • F SELF-TIMER
• DYNAMIC RANGE • FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• D RANGE PRIORITY • F IS MODE BOOST
• WHITE BALANCE • ZEBRA SETTING
• CLARITY • INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
• SELECT CUSTOM SETTING ADJUSTMENT
• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING • 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
• FOCUS AREA • MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
• FOCUS CHECK • VIEW MODE SETTING
• AF MODE • PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS • PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF • NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH • HISTOGRAM
• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF • ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH
• AF RANGE LIMITER • LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• FOCUS CHECK LOCK • F-Log VIEW ASSIST
• DRIVE SETTING • ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
• SPORTS FINDER MODE • APERTURE SETTING
Shortcuts

• PRE-SHOT sJ • LOCK SETTING

• SELF-TIMER • PERFORMANCE
• PHOTOMETRY • AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER
10 • SHUTTER TYPE • Bluetooth ON/OFF
• FLICKER REDUCTION • QUICK MENU
• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING • PLAYBACK
• ISO AUTO SETTING • NONE
• IS MODE
N To disable touch-function gestures, choose NONE.
328
 Function Controls

Lens Function Buttons

Choose the roles played by the function buttons on the lens
(where applicable).

Lens Function Button Defaults

The default assignments are:
N A XF18-120mmF4 LM PZ WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.

Lens function button Default

A Z/F ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
B L-Fn1 (rocker zoom button pressed up) CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)
C L-Fn2 (rocker zoom button pressed down) CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)

Shortcuts

10

329
 Assigning Roles to the Lens Function Buttons
The roles played by the lens function buttons can be selected
using the D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING  > POWER ZOOM LENS
FUNCTION (Fn) SETTING option in the setup menu.
• IMAGE SIZE • IS MODE
• IMAGE QUALITY • DIGITAL TELE-CONV.
• RAW • MULTI EXPOSURE
• FILM SIMULATION • WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
• GRAIN EFFECT • FLASH FUNCTION SETTING
• COLOR CHROME EFFECT • TTL-LOCK
• COLOR CHROME FX BLUE • MODELING FLASH
• SMOOTH SKIN EFFECT • MOVIE RECORDING RELEASE
• DYNAMIC RANGE • HIGH SPEED REC
• D RANGE PRIORITY • F SELF-TIMER
• WHITE BALANCE • FIX MOVIE CROP MAGNIFICATION
• CLARITY • F IS MODE BOOST
• SELECT CUSTOM SETTING • ZEBRA SETTING
• RECALL CUSTOM 1 SETTING • INTERNAL/EXTERNAL MIC LEVEL
• FOCUS AREA ADJUSTMENT
• FOCUS CHECK • 4ch AUDIO PLAYBACK
• AF MODE • MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL
• AF-C CUSTOM SETTINGS • VIEW MODE SETTING
• FACE DETECTION ON/OFF • PREVIEW DEPTH OF FIELD
• RIGHT/LEFT EYE SWITCH • PREVIEW EXP./WB IN MANUAL MODE
• SUBJECT DETECTION ON/OFF • NATURAL LIVE VIEW
• AF RANGE LIMITER • HISTOGRAM
Shortcuts

• FOCUS CHECK LOCK • ELECTRONIC LEVEL SWITCH

• DRIVE SETTING • LARGE INDICATORS MODE
• SPORTS FINDER MODE • F-Log VIEW ASSIST
10 • PRE-SHOT sJ • ZOOM/FOCUS CONTROL RING
• SELF-TIMER • CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (T)
• PHOTOMETRY • CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W)
• SHUTTER TYPE • F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (N)
• FLICKER REDUCTION • F CONSTANT SPEED FOCUS (F)
• FLICKERLESS S.S. SETTING • AE LOCK ONLY
• ISO AUTO SETTING • AF LOCK ONLY
330
 Function Controls

• AE/AF LOCK • AUTO IMAGE TRANSFER ORDER

• AF-ON • Bluetooth ON/OFF
• AWB LOCK ONLY • QUICK MENU
• APERTURE SETTING • PLAYBACK
• LOCK SETTING • NONE
• PERFORMANCE
N • To disable the function button, choose NONE.
• Selected function lock is not available when CONSTANT SPEED
ZOOM (T) or CONSTANT SPEED ZOOM (W) is assigned to a lens
function button (P 305).

Shortcuts

10

331
MEMO

332
Peripherals and Optional
Accessories

333
 Lenses
The camera can be used with lenses for the FUJIFILM
X-mount.

Lens Parts
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

A Lens hood F O.I.S. switch

B Mounting marks G Aperture mode switch
C Focus ring H Lens signal contacts
D Zoom ring I Front lens cap
E Aperture ring J Rear lens cap
N A XF18-55mmF2.8-4 R LM OIS lens is used here for illustrative purposes.

11

334
 Lenses

Lens Care
• Use a blower to remove dust, then gently wipe with a soft, dry
cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gently
with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied.
• Replace the front and rear caps when the lens is not in use.
Removing Lens Caps
Remove lens caps as shown.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

O Lens caps may differ from those shown.

11

335
 Attaching Lens Hoods
When attached, lens hoods reduce glare
and protect the front lens element.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

336
 Lenses

Lenses with Aperture Rings

At settings other than A, you can adjust
aperture by rotating the lens aperture A 16 11 8 5.6 4 2.8

ring (exposure modes A and M).

A 16 11 8 5.6 4

Aperture ring

N • Selecting ON for MOVIE OPTIMIZED CONTROL oL disables the

aperture ring.
• If COMMAND is selected for D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > APERTURE
RING SETTING (A) when the aperture ring is set to A, aperture can be
adjusted by rotating the command dials.

The Aperture Mode Switch

If the lens has an aperture mode switch, aper-
ture can be adjusted manually by sliding the
switch to Z and rotating the aperture ring.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Aperture ring
Aperture mode switch

11

337
 Lenses with No Aperture Rings
The method used to adjust aperture
can be selected using D BUTTON/DIAL
SETTING  > APERTURE SETTING. When
an option other than AUTO is selected,
aperture can be adjusted using the front
command dial.
N Aperture control defaults to the front command dial, but can be reas-
signed to the rear command dial using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING >
COMMAND DIAL SETTING.

Lenses with O.I.S. Switches

If the lens supports optical image sta-
bilization (O.I.S.), the image stabiliza-
tion mode can be chosen in the camera
menus. To activate image stabilization,
slide the O.I.S. switch to ON.
O.I.S. switch
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

338
 Lenses

Manual Focus Lenses

Slide the focus ring to the front for auto-
focus.

For manual focus, slide the focus ring to

the back and rotate it while checking the
results in the camera display. The focus
distance and depth-of-field indicators
can be used to assist manual focus.

O Note that manual focus may not be available in all shooting modes.
The Depth-of-Field Indicator
The depth-of-field indicator shows the approxi-
mate depth of field (the distance in front of and
behind the focus point that appears to be in

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

focus). The indicator is displayed in film format.

11

339
 Lenses

Power Zoom Lenses

Zoom can be adjusted on power zoom lenses using the zoom/
focus control ring, zoom button, or zoom ring.
O Adjusting zoom while the lens is wet makes it easier for water to find
its way inside the lens. Wipe any water from the lens before adjusting
zoom.

N A XF18-120mmF4 LM PZ WR lens is used here for illustrative purposes.

Control Description
A Zoom ring Rotate the zoom ring to zoom in or out manually.
Rotate the zoom/focus control ring to zoom in or out
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

B Zoom/focus control ring using powered zoom. The zoom speed is proportional
to the speed with which the ring is rotated.
Switch the role of zoom/focus control ring from focus
C Z/F (zoom/focus) button
to zoom or vice versa.
Press a zoom button to zoom in or out at a steady
D Zoom buttons speed using powered zoom. Zoom ends when the
button is pressed a second time.

N • The Z/F and zoom buttons can be assigned other roles using
D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > POWER ZOOM LENS FUNCTION (Fn)
SETTING.
• The speed at which zoom can be adjusted via the zoom buttons can
11 be chosen using D BUTTON/DIAL SETTING > LENS ZOOM/FOCUS
SETTING.

340
 External Flash Units
Use optional external flash units for flash photography.
Some units support high-speed sync (FP) and can be used
at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed, while
others can function as commanders controlling remote
units via optical wireless flash control.
O You may be unable to test-fire the flash in some circumstances, for ex-
ample when a setup menu is displayed on the camera.
Red-Eye Removal
Red-eye removal is available when FLASH is selected for F FLASH
SETTING  > RED EYE REMOVAL. Red-eye removal minimizes “red-eye”
caused when light from the flash is reflected from the subject’s retinas.
Flash Sync Speed
The flash will synchronize with the shutter at shutter speeds of ½50  s or
slower.
Optional Flash Units from Fujifilm
The camera can be used with optional Fujifilm shoe-mounted flash units.
Third-Party Flash Units
Do not use third-party flash units that apply over 300 V to the camera hot

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

shoe.

11

341
 Flash Settings
1 Connect the unit to the camera.
2 In shooting mode, select FLASH FLASH SETTING

FUNCTION SETTING in the F (FLASH FLASH FUNCTION SETTING

RED EYE REMOVAL
SETTING) menu tab. The options TTL-LOCK MODE
LED LIGHT SETTING
available vary with the flash unit. COMMANDER SETTING
CH SETTING

EXIT

Menu Description P
Displayed when an optional EF-X8 flash unit is mounted
EF-X8 343
on the hot shoe and raised.
Adjust settings for flash units connected via the sync
SYNC terminal. SYNC TERMINAL is displayed if the EF-X8 is
345
TERMINAL lowered and either no flash unit, or an incompatible flash
unit, is mounted on the hot shoe.
SHOE MOUNT Displayed when an optional flash unit other than the
346
FLASH EF-X8 is mounted on the hot shoe and turned on.
Displayed if an optional flash unit functioning as a com-
COMMANDER
mander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control is 349
(OPTICAL)
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

connected and turned on.

MODE
3 Highlight items using the selector EF-X8
and rotate the rear command dial to
change the highlighted setting.

ADJUST END

4 Press DISP/BACK to put the changes into effect.

11

342
 External Flash Units

EF-X8
The following settings are available when an optional EF-X8
shoe-mounted flash unit is attached.
MODE
EF-X8

ADJUST END

Setting Description
Choose from the following options:
• TTL: TTL mode. Adjust flash compensation (B) and choose
a flash mode (C).
• M: The flash fires at the selected output (B) regardless of
subject brightness or camera settings. Output is expressed
in fractions of full power, from ⁄ to ⁄. The desired results

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

may not be achieved at low values if they exceed the limits
of the flash control system; take a test shot and check the
A Flash control mode results.
• C (COMMANDER): Choose if the flash is being used to con-
trol remote synced flash units, for example as part of a stu-
dio flash system.
• D (OFF): The EF-X8 does not fire. Flash units connected
via the sync terminal will still fire when the shutter is re-
leased, but can be disabled by lowering the EF-X8 and turn-
ing the units off in the flash settings menu.
B Flash compensation/ Adjust flash level. The options available vary with the flash
output control mode (A).
11

343
 Setting Description
Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options avail-
able vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash lev-
el is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indi-
cates that the flash will fire when the photo is taken.

C Flash mode (TTL)

• F (STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possible;
flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is
released.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.
Choose whether the flash is timed to fire immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
D Sync it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in
most circumstances.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

344
 External Flash Units

SYNC TERMINAL
The following options are available when no compatible flash
unit is connected or if a unit is connected via the sync terminal or
uses only the X-contact on the hot shoe.
MODE
SYNC TERMINAL

ADJUST END

Setting Description
Choose from the following options:
• M: A trigger signal is transmitted via the hot shoe X contacts
when a picture is taken. Choose a shutter speed slower than
A Flash control mode the sync speed; even slower speeds may be required if the
unit uses long flashes or has a slow response time.
• D (OFF): The trigger signal is disabled.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Choose whether the flash is timed to fire immediately after
the shutter opens (H/1ST CURTAIN) or immediately before
B Sync it closes (I/2ND CURTAIN). 1ST CURTAIN is recommended in
most circumstances.
The Sync Terminal
Use the sync terminal to connect flash units
that require a sync cable.

11

345
 SHOE MOUNT FLASH
The following options are available when an optional
shoe-mounted flash unit is attached and turned on.
MODE
SHOE MOUNT FLASH

ADJUST END

Setting Description
The flash control mode selected with the flash unit. This can
in some cases be adjusted from the camera; the options avail-
able vary with the flash.
• TTL: TTL mode. Adjust flash compensation (B).
• M: The flash fires at the selected output regardless of subject
A Flash control mode brightness or camera settings. Output in some cases can be
adjusted from the camera (B).
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

• MULTI: Repeating flash. Compatible shoe-mounted flash

units will fire multiple times with each shot.
• D (OFF): The flash does not fire. Some flash units can be
turned off from the camera.

11

346
 External Flash Units

Setting Description
The options available vary with flash control mode.
• TTL: Adjust flash compensation (the full value may not be
applied if the limits of the flash control system are exceed-
ed). In the cases of the EF-X20, EF-20, and EF-42, the select-
ed value is added to the value selected with the flash unit.
B Flash compensation/ • M/MULTI: Adjust flash output (compatible units only).
output
Choose from values expressed as fractions of full power,
from ⁄ (mode M) or ¼ (MULTI) down to ⁄ in increments
equivalent to ⁄ EV. The desired results may not be achieved
at low values if they exceed the limits of the flash control
system; take a test shot and check the results.
Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options avail-
able vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) selected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash lev-
el is adjusted according to subject brightness. A p icon
displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway indi-
cates that the flash will fire when the photo is taken.
• F (STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possible;
C Flash mode (TTL) flash level is adjusted according to subject brightness. The
flash will not fire if not fully charged when the shutter is

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

released.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not fully
charged when the shutter is released.

11

347
 Setting Description
Control flash timing.
• H (1ST CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately after the shut-
ter opens (generally the best choice).
• I (2ND CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately before the
shutter closes.
D Sync • R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-
speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for flash control mode.
The angle of illumination (flash coverage) for units that sup-
port flash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be
E Zoom made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will auto-
matically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:
• J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly reducing
coverage.
F Lighting • K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
• L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage for
more even lighting.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

Choose how the built-in LED light functions during still photog-
raphy (compatible units only): as a catchlight (M/CATCHLIGHT),
G LED light as an AF-assist illuminator (N/AF ASSIST), or as both a catch-
light and an AF-assist illuminator (O/AF ASSIST+CATCHLIGHT).
Choose OFF to disable the LED during photography.
Choose the number of times the flash fires each time the
G Number of flashes * shutter is released in MULTI mode.
H Frequency * Choose the frequency at which the flash fires in MULTI mode.
* Full value may not be applied if limits of flash control system are exceeded.

11

348
 External Flash Units

COMMANDER(OPTICAL)
The options will be displayed if the unit is currently functioning
as a commander for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control.
MODE
COMMANDER(OPTICAL)

ADJUST END

Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control offers a choice of

four channels (Channels 1 through 4) for the exchange of optical
signals between the commander and remote flash units. Sepa-
rate channels can be used for different flash systems or to pre-
vent interference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
The flash units can also be placed in up to

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

three groups (A, B, and C) and flash mode
and flash level adjusted separately for C
each group. A

11

349
 Setting Description
Choose flash control modes for groups A, B, and C. TTL%
is available for groups A and B only.
A Flash control mode • TTL: The units in the group fire in TTL mode. Flash com-
(group A)
pensation can be adjusted separately for each group.
• TTL%: If TTL% is selected for either group A or B, you can
specify the output of the selected group as a percent-
age of the other and adjust overall flash compensation
B Flash control mode for both groups.
(group B)
• M: In mode M, the units in the group fire at the selected
output (expressed as a fraction of full power) regardless
of subject brightness or camera settings.
• MULTI: Choosing MULTI for any group sets all the units
C Flash control mode in all groups to repeating flash mode. All units will fire
(group C) multiple times with each shot.
• D (OFF): If OFF is selected, the units in the group will
not fire.
Adjust flash level for the selected group according to
D Flash compensation/
output (group A) option selected for flash control mode. Note that the full
value may not be applied if the limits of the flash control
E Flash compensation/ system are exceeded.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

output (group B) • TTL: Adjust flash compensation.

• M/MULTI: Adjust flash output.
F Flash compensation/ • TTL%: Choose the balance between groups A and B and
output (group C) adjust overall flash compensation.

11

350
 External Flash Units

Setting Description
Choose a flash mode for TTL flash control. The options
available vary with the shooting mode (P, S, A, or M) se-
lected.
• E (FLASH AUTO): The flash fires only as required; flash
level is adjusted according to subject brightness. A
p icon displayed when the shutter button is pressed
halfway indicates that the flash will fire when the photo
is taken.
G Flash mode (TTL) • F (STANDARD): The flash fires with every shot if possi-
ble; flash level is adjusted according to subject bright-
ness. The flash will not fire if not fully charged when the
shutter is released.
• G (SLOW SYNC.): Combine the flash with slow shutter
speeds when photographing portrait subjects against a
backdrop of night scenery. The flash will not fire if not
fully charged when the shutter is released.
Control flash timing.
• H (1ST CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately after the
shutter opens (generally the best choice).
• I (2ND CURTAIN): The flash fires immediately before the

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

shutter closes.
H Sync • R (AUTO FP(HSS)): High-speed sync (compatible units only).
The camera automatically engages front-curtain high-
speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync
speed. Equivalent to 1ST CURTAIN when MULTI is selected
for flash control mode.
The angle of illumination (flash coverage) for units that sup-
port flash zoom. Some units allow the adjustment to be
I Zoom made from the camera. If AUTO is selected, zoom will auto-
matically be adjusted to match coverage to lens focal length.
If the unit supports this feature, choose from:
• J (FLASH POWER PRIORITY): Gain range by slightly re-
ducing coverage. 11
J Lighting • K (STANDARD): Match coverage to picture angle.
• L (EVEN COVERAGE PRIORITY): Slightly increase coverage
for more even lighting.

351
 External Flash Units

Setting Description
Choose the group for units functioning as a command-
er for Fujifilm optical wireless remote flash control in TTL,
TTL%, or M mode. This option is available only with clip-
on flash units that support Fujifilm optical wireless remote
flash control.
K Commander • Gr A: Assign the commander to group A.
• Gr B: Assign the commander to group B.
• Gr C: Assign the commander to group C.
• OFF: Output from the commander is held to a level that
does not affect the final picture.
Choose the number of times the flash fires each time the
K Number of flashes shutter is released in MULTI mode.
Choose the channel used by the commander for commu-
nication with the remote flash units. Separate channels
L Channel can be used for different flash systems or to prevent in-
terference when multiple systems are operating in close
proximity.
Choose the frequency at which the flash fires in MULTI
L Frequency mode.
Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

352
 Handgrips
Using a handgrip makes the camera easier to hold.
The MHG-XT5 handgrip attaches to the tripod socket.

Peripherals and Optional Accessories

11

353
MEMO

354
Technical Notes

355
 Accessories from Fujifilm
The following optional accessories are available from Fujifilm.
For the latest information on the accessories available in your
region, check with your local Fujifilm representative or visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.
Rechargeable Li-ion batteries
NP-W235: Additional high-capacity NP-W235 rechargeable batteries can be pur-
chased as required.
Dual battery chargers
BC-W235: The BC-W235 can charge up to two NP-W235 batteries at a time. At
+25 °C/+77 °F, the batteries will charge in about 200 minutes. Using a device that
supplies power with an outputs of 30 W or above reduces charging times to as
little as 150 minutes.
Eye cups
EC-XH W/EC-XT L/EC-XT M/EC-XT S/EC-GFX: Attach viewfinder eyecups to prevent light
leaking into the viewfinder window.
Remote releases
RR-100: Use to reduce camera shake or keep the shutter open during a time ex-
posure (⌀2.5 mm).
Stereo microphones
MIC-ST1: An external microphone for movie recording.
FUJINON lenses
XF-/XC-series lenses: Interchangeable lenses for use exclusively with the FUJIFILM
X-mount.
FUJINON MKX-series lenses: Cinema lenses for the FUJIFILM X-mount.
Macro extension tubes
MCEX-11/16: Attach between the camera and the lens to shoot at high reproduc-
Technical Notes

tion ratios.
Teleconverters
XF1.4X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 1.4×.
XF2X TC WR: Increases the focal length of the compatible lenses by about 2.0×.

12

356
 Accessories from Fujifilm

Mount adapters
FUJIFILM M MOUNT ADAPTER: Allows the camera to be used with a wide selection
of M-mount lenses.
Body caps
BCP-001: Cover the camera lens mount when no lens is attached.
Shoe-mounted flash units
EF-X500: In addition to manual and TTL flash control, this clip-on flash unit has a
Guide Number of 50/164 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), al-
lowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the flash sync speed. Featuring
support for the optional EF-BP1 battery pack and Fujifilm optical wireless flash
control, it can be used as a commander or remote flash unit for remote wireless
flash photography.
EF-BP1: A battery pack for EF-X500 flash units. Takes up to 8 AA batteries.
EF-60: In addition to manual and TTL flash control, this clip-on flash unit has a
Guide Number of 60/197 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and supports FP (high-speed sync), al-
lowing it to be used at shutter speeds that exceed the flash sync speed. It can also
be used as remote flash under the control of an optional EF-W1 wireless com-
mander.
EF-W1: With support for the NAS * wireless communication standard developed
by Nissin Japan, this wireless flash commander can be used with optional EF-60
clip-on flash units and other NAS-compliant units.
* NAS is a registered trademark of Nissin Japan Ltd.
EF-X8: This compact, clip-on flash unit draws power from the camera has a Guide
Number of approximately 8/26 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and can cover the angle of view of
a 16 mm lens (equivalent to 24 mm in 35 mm format).
EF-42: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 42/137 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports manual and TTL flash control.
EF-X20: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports manual and TTL flash control.
Technical Notes

EF-20: This clip-on flash unit has a Guide Number of 20/65 (ISO 100, m/ft.) and
supports TTL flash control (manual flash control is not supported).
Handgrips
MHG-XT5: Makes the camera easier to hold. Pictures can be taken and batteries
and memory cards inserted or removed with the camera still in its case.
12

357
 Accessories from Fujifilm

Tripod grips
TG-BT1: Record movies, take photographs, or adjust zoom on compatible power
zoom lenses while holding this Bluetooth tripod grip.
Grip belts
GB-001: Improves grip. Combine with a hand grip for more secure handling.
instax SHARE printers
SP-1/SP-2/SP-3: Connect via wireless LAN to print pictures on instax film.
Technical Notes

12

358
 Software for Use with Your Camera
The camera can be used with the following software. For the
latest information on software available from Fujifilm, visit
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/cameras/.

Smartphone Apps
Establish a wireless connection between your camera and a
smartphone or tablet.
https://app.fujifilm-dsc.com/

RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX

RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is RAW conver-
sion software from Ichikawa Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd. View RAW
pictures on your computer and convert them into other formats.
RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX is available free of
charge from the Fujifilm website.
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/software/raw-file-converter-
ex-powered-by-silkypix/
N • “RAW FILE CONVERTER EX powered by SILKYPIX” is supplied by Ichikawa
Soft Laboratory Co., Ltd.
• For information on when support will be available, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/compatibility/software/raw-file-converter-ex-
powered-by-silkypix/
Technical Notes

12

359
 Capture One Express for Fujifilm
View RAW pictures on your computer and convert them into oth-
er formats. Capture One Express for Fujifilm is available free of
charge from Capture One A/S.
https://www.captureone.com/products-plans/capture-one-express/fujifilm
N Visit the website above for information on when support will be avail-
able.

Capture One for Fujifilm

Capture One for Fujifilm workflow software from Capture One
A/S supports tethered shooting and the conversion of RAW pic-
tures into other formats.
https://www.captureone.com/explore-features/fujifilm
N Visit the website above for information on when support will be avail-
able.

FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in (Exclusively for Lightroom)

A plug-in for Adobe Lightroom Classic.
• FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in PRO/FUJIFILM Tether Shooting Plug-in
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/adobe-photoshop-lightroom-
tether-plugin/
Technical Notes

12

360
 Software for Use with Your Camera

FUJIFILM X Acquire
This computer application lets you connect to the camera via USB
or Wi-Fi and automatically download photos to a specified folder
as they are taken, or backup and restore the camera via USB.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-acquire/

FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO

When the camera is connected to a computer via USB, FUJIFILM
X RAW STUDIO can use the camera’s unique image processing
engine to rapidly convert RAW files to create high-quality images
in other formats.
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/x-raw-studio/

FUJIFILM Pixel Shift Combiner

Computer software for combining pictures taken using pixel-shift
multi-shot or reducing false colors (P 177).
https://fujifilm-x.com/products/software/pixel-shift-combiner/

Technical Notes

12

361
 For Your Safety
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
• Read Instructions
Instructions: All the safety and operating instructions Power-Cord Protection: Power-supply cords should be routed
should be read before the appliance is operated. so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by
• Retain Instructions
Instructions: The safety and operating instructions items placed upon or against them, paying particular atten-
should be retained for future reference. tion to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
• Heed Warnings
Warnings: All warnings on the appliance and in the where they exit from the appliance.
operating instructions should be adhered to. Accessories: Do not place this video product on an unstable
• Follow Instructions
Instructions: All operating and use instructions cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The video product may
should be followed. fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
Installation damage to the appliance. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
Power Sources: This video product should be operated only bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
from the type of power source indicated on the marking la- with the video product. Any mounting of the appliance
bel. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should
home, consult your appliance dealer or local power com- use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufac-
pany. For video products intended to operate from battery turer.
power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. An appliance and cart combination
Grounding or Polarization: This video product is equipped should be moved with care. Quick
with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having stops, excessive force, and uneven
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the surfaces may cause the appliance and
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are cart combination to overturn.
unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing
the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electri-
cian to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety Antennas
purpose of the polarized plug. Outdoor Antenna Grounding: If an outside antenna or cable
system is connected to the video product, be sure the an-
Alternate Warnings: This video product is equipped with tenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
a three-wire grounding-type plug, a plug having a third protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding-type Section 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA No.
power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to 70, provides information with respect to proper grounding of
insert the plug into the outlet, contact your electrician to re- the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in
place your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding con-
of the grounding type plug. ductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to
Overloading: Do not overload wall outlets and extension grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding
cords as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. electrode.
Ventilation: Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS
for ventilation, to ensure reliable operation of the video prod- PER NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
uct and to protect it from overheating, and these openings
Ground Clamp Antenna Lead
must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never
in Wire
be blocked by placing the video product on a bed, sofa, rug,
or other similar surface. AAnntenna
This video product should not be placed in a built-in instal- Electric Servicee Equipmentt Discharge Unit
D
Technical Notes

lation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is (NEC

N SECTION
provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been ad- 8
810-20)
hered to. This video product should never be placed near or Ground Clamps
over a radiator or heat register. Grounding
Power Service Grounding Electrode Conductors (NEC
Attachments: Do not use attachments not recommended by
System (NEC ART 250. PART H) SECTION 810-21)
the video product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
Water and Moisture: Do not use this video product near wa-
ter—for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink,
12 or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool,
and the like.

362
 For Your Safety

Power Lines: An outside antenna system should not be locat- Damage Requiring Service: Unplug this video product from
ed in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service person-
light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power nel under the following conditions:
lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, • When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged
extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such • If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. video product.
Use • If the video product has been exposed to rain or water.
Cleaning: Unplug this video product from the wall outlet be- •
If the video product has been dropped or the cabinet has
been damaged.
fore cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
If the video product does not operate normally follow the
Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are
Object and Liquid Entry: Never push objects of any kind into covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjust-
this video product through openings as they may touch dan- ment of other controls may result in damage and will often
gerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore
a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the the video product to its normal operation.
video product.
When the video product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
Lightning: For added protection for this video product re- mance — this indicates a need for service.
ceiver during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended
Replacement Parts: When replacement parts are required, be
and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall
sure the service technician has used replacement parts spec-
outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will
ified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as
prevent damage to the video product due to lightning and
the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in
power-line surges.
fire, electric shock or other hazards.
Service Safety Check: Upon completion of any service or repairs to
Servicing: Do not attempt to service this video product this video product, ask the service technician to perform
yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to safety checks to determine that the video product is in prop-
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to er operating condition.
qualified service personnel.

Be sure to read these notes before use

Safety Notes The symbols on the product (including the accesories) rep-
resent the following:
• Make sure that you use your camera correctly. Read these
safety notes and your Basic Manual carefully before use. AC
• After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. DC
About the Icons Class II equipment (The construction of the product
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate is double-insulated.)
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in-
formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is  WARNING
used incorrectly as a result.
If a problem arises, turn the camera off, remove the
This icon indicates that death or serious in- battery, disconnect the USB cable, and unplug the AC
WARNING jury can result if the information is ignored.
power adapter. Continued use of the camera when
This icon indicates that personal injury or
Unplug it is emitting smoke, is emitting any unusual odor,
from power
or is in any other abnormal state can cause a fire or
CAUTION material damage can result if the informa-
Technical Notes

socket
tion is ignored. electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer.

The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the Do not allow water or foreign objects to enter the cam-
instructions which are to be observed. era or connecting cables. Do not use the camera or
connecting cables following ingress of fresh or salt
Triangular icons tell you that this information re- water, milk, beverages, detergents, or other liquids.
quires attention (“Important”). Should liquid find its way into the camera or connecting
Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the cables, turn the camera off, remove the battery, discon-
action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”). nect the USB cable, and disconnect and unplug the AC
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
adapter. Continued use of the camera can cause a
fire or electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer.
12
action that must be performed (“Required”).

363
  WARNING  WARNING
If the battery leaks and fluid gets in contact with your
Do not use the camera in the bathroom or shower. This eyes, skin or clothing, flush the affected area with clean
Do not use in can cause a fire or electric shock. water and seek medical attention or call an emergency
the bathroom
or shower number right away.
Never attempt to change or take apart the camera (nev- Do not use the charger to charge batteries other than
er open the case). Failure to observe this precaution those specified here. The supplied charger is for use
Do not
disassemble
can cause fire or electric shock. only with batteries of the type supplied with the
Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other camera. Using the charger to charge conventional
accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob- batteries or other types of rechargeable batteries
serve this precaution could result in electric shock can cause the battery to leak, overheat or burst.
or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re- Using a flash too close to a person’s eyes may cause
Do not touch
internal move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid visual impairment. Take particular care when pho-
parts injury or electric shock, and take the product to the tographing infants and young children.
point of purchase for consultation. Do not remain in prolonged contact with hot surfaces.
Do not change, heat or unduly twist or pull the connec- Do not leave one part of the body in contact with the
tion cord and do not place heavy objects on the connec- product for prolonged periods while the product is on.
tion cord. These actions could damage the cord and Failure to observe this precaution could result in
cause a fire or electric shock. If the cord is damaged, low-temperature burns, particularly during pro-
contact your Fujifilm dealer. Do not use cables with longed use, at high ambient temperatures, when
bent connectors. HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF TEMP.,
Do not place the camera on an unstable surface. This or with users who suffer from poor circulation or
can cause the camera to fall or tip over and cause reduced sensation, in which case use of a tripod or
injury. similar precautions are recommended.

Never attempt to take pictures while in motion. Do Do not use in the presence of flammable objects, explo-
not use the camera while walking or driving. This sive gases, or dust.
can result in you falling down or being involved in When carrying the battery, install it in a digital camera
a traffic accident. or keep it in the hard case. When storing the battery,
Do not touch any metal parts of the camera during a keep it in the hard case. When discarding, cover the
thunderstorm. This can cause an electric shock due battery terminals with insulation tape. Contact with
to induced current from the lightning discharge. other metallic objects or batteries could cause the
battery to ignite or burst.
Do not use the battery except as specified. Load the
battery as shown by the indicator. Keep memory cards, hot shoes, and other small parts
out of the reach of small children. Children may
Do not disassemble, modify, or heat batteries. Do not swallow small parts; keep out of reach of children.
drop, strike, or throw batteries or otherwise subject Should a child swallow a small part, seek medical
them to strong impacts. Do not use batteries that show attention or call emergency.
signs of leaking, deformation, discoloration, or other
abnormalities. Use only designated chargers to re- Keep out of reach of small children. Among the ele-
charge rechargeable batteries and do not attempt to re- ments that could cause injury are the strap, which
charge non-rechargeable Li-ion or alkaline batteries. Do could become entangled about a child’s neck,
not short batteries or store them with metallic objects. causing strangulation, and the flash, which could
cause visual impairment.
Technical Notes

Failure to observe these precautions could result

in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or Follow the directions of airline and hospital personnel.
leaking, causing fire, burns, or other injury. This product generates radio-frequency emissions
Use only batteries or AC power adapters specified for that could interfere with navigational or medical
use with this camera. Do not use voltages other than the equipment.
power supply voltage shown. The use of other power
sources can cause a fire.

12

364
 For Your Safety

 CAUTION
Do not use this camera in locations affected by oil
fumes, steam, humidity or dust. This can cause a fire
or electric shock.
Do not leave this camera in places subject to extremely
high temperatures. Do not leave the camera in loca-
tions such as a sealed vehicle or in direct sunlight.
This can cause a fire.
Do not place heavy objects on the camera. This can
cause the heavy object to tip over or fall and cause
injury.
Do not move the camera while the AC power adapter is
still connected. Do not pull on the connection cord to
disconnect the AC power adapter. This can damage
the power cord or cables and cause a fire or electric
shock.
Do not cover or wrap the camera or the AC power adapt-
er in a cloth or blanket. This can cause heat to build
up and distort the casing or cause a fire.
Do not use the plug if it is damaged or if it does not fit
securely into the outlet. Failure to observe this pre-
caution could result in fire or electric shock.
When you are cleaning the camera or you do not plan to
use the camera for an extended period, remove the bat-
tery and disconnect and unplug the AC power adapter.
Failure to do so can cause a fire or electric shock.
When charging ends, unplug the charger from the
power socket. Leaving the charger plugged into the
power socket can cause a fire.
When a memory card is removed, the card could come
out of the slot too quickly. Use your finger to hold it and
gently release the card. Injury could result to those
struck by the ejected card.
Do not handle the memory card immediately after
shooting. The memory card may be hot, resulting
in burns. Wait for the card to cool before removing
it from the camera.
Request regular internal testing and cleaning for your
camera. Build-up of dust in your camera can cause
a fire or electric shock. Contact your Fujifilm dealer
to request internal cleaning every two years. Please
Technical Notes

note that this service is not free of charge.

Dispose of the product in accord with location regula-
tions.
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
Batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not
be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or
the like. 12

365
 The Battery and Power Supply
Note: Check the type of battery used in your camera and read ■ Cautions: Handling the Battery
the appropriate sections. • Do not transport or store with metal objects such as neck-
  WARNING: Battery shall not be exposed to excessive heat
laces or hairpins.
such as sunshine, fire or the like. • Do not expose to flame or heat.
The following describes the proper use of batteries and how •
Do not disassemble or modify.
to prolong their life. Incorrect use can shorten battery life or •
Do not expose to low atmospheric pressures.
cause leakage, overheating, fire, or explosion. • Use with designated chargers only.
• Dispose of used batteries promptly.
Li-ion Batteries • Do not drop or subject to strong physical shocks.
Read this section if your camera uses a rechargeable Li-ion • Do not expose to water.
battery. • Keep the terminals clean.
The battery is not charged at shipment. Charge the battery • The battery and camera body may become warm to the
before use. Keep the battery in its case when not in use. touch after extended use. This is normal.
■ Notes on the Battery ■ Caution: Disposal

The battery gradually loses its charge when not in use. Dispose of used batteries in accord with local regulations.
Charge the battery one or two days before use. Attention should be drawn to the environmental aspects of
battery disposal. Use the apparatus under moderate climate.
Battery life can be extended by turning the camera off when
not in use. Do not mechanically crush or split batteries.
Battery capacity decreases at low temperatures; a depleted AC Power Adapters
battery may not function when cold. Keep a fully charged • The AC power adapter is for indoor use only.
spare battery in a warm place and exchange as necessary, • Be sure the cable is securely connected to the camera.
or keep the battery in your pocket or other warm place and • Turn the camera off before disconnecting the adapter. Dis-
insert it in the camera only when shooting. Do not place the connect the adapter by the plug, not the cable.
battery in direct contact with hand warmers or other heating • Do not disassemble.
devices. • Do not expose to high heat and humidity.
■ Charging the Battery • Do not subject to strong physical shocks.
The battery can be charged using the camera and supplied • The adapter may hum or become hot to the touch during
AC adapter or an optional BC-W235 dual battery charger. use. This is normal.
Charging times will increase at ambient temperatures below • If the adapter causes radio interference, reorient or relocate
+10 °C (+50 °F) or above +35 °C (+95 °F). Do not attempt to the receiving antenna.
charge the battery at temperatures above +40 °C (+104 °F); at
temperatures below +5 °C (+41 °F), the battery will not charge.
Do not attempt to recharge a fully charged battery. The battery
does not however need to be fully discharged before charging.
The battery may be warm to the touch immediately after
charging or use. This is normal.
■ Battery Life
A noticeable decrease in the length of time the battery will
hold a charge indicates that it has reached the end of its ser-
vice life and should be replaced.
If the battery is left for long periods without charging, you
may find that its quality degrades or that it no longer holds a
Technical Notes

charge. Charge the battery regularly.

■ Storage
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, store
it at room temperature with the battery charged to approxi-
mately one half to ⁄ capacity.
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, re-
move the battery and store it in a dry place with an ambient
temperature of from +15 °C to +25 °C (+59 °F to +77 °F). Do
12 not store in locations exposed to extremes of temperature.

366
 For Your Safety

Using the Camera

• Do not aim the camera at extremely bright light sources, Trademark Information
including artificial light sources or natural light sources Digital Split Image is a trademark or registered trademark of
such as the sun in a cloudless sky. Failure to observe this FUJIFILM Corporation. Digital Micro Prism is a trademark or
precaution could damage the camera image sensor. registered trademark of FUJIFILM Corporation. The typefaces
• Strong sunlight focused through the viewfinder may dam- included herein are solely developed by DynaComware Tai-
age the panel of electronic viewfinder (EVF). Do not aim wan Inc. Apple, iPhone, iPad, Mac, Mac OS X, OS X, macOS,
the electronic viewfinder at the sun. Lightning and Apple ProRes are registered trademarks of
Apple Inc. in the U.S.A. and other countries. Windows is a
Take Test Shots
registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A.
Before taking photographs on important occasions (such as
and other countries. Android is a trademark or registered
at weddings or before taking the camera on a trip), take a
trademark of Google LLC. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Photo-
test shot and view the results to ensure that the camera is
shop, and Lightroom are trademarks or registered trademarks
functioning normally. FUJIFILM  Corporation cannot accept
of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other coun-
liability for damages or lost profits incurred as a result of
tries. Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, and Wi-Fi Protected
product malfunction.
Setup® are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance®. The
Notes on Copyright Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks
Unless intended solely for personal use, images recorded owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks
using your digital camera system cannot be used in ways by Fujifilm is under license. The SDHC and SDXC logos are
that infringe copyright laws without the consent of the own- trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. CFexpress is a trademark of the CFA
er. Note that some restrictions apply to the photographing (CompactFlash Association). The HDMI logo is a trademark or
of stage performances, entertainments, and exhibits, even registered trademark of HDMI Licensing LLC. All other trade
when intended purely for personal use. Users are also asked names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or regis-
to note that the transfer of memory cards containing images tered trademarks of their respective owners.
or data protected under copyright laws is only permissible
Electrical Interference
within the restrictions imposed by those copyright laws.
This camera may interfere with hospital or aviation equip-
Handling ment. Consult with hospital or airline staff before using the
To ensure that images are recorded correctly, do not subject camera in a hospital or on an aircraft.
the camera to impact or physical shocks while images are
Color Television Systems
being recorded.
NTSC (National Television System Committee) is a color tele-
Liquid Crystal vision telecasting specification adopted mainly in the U.S.A.,
In the event that the display is damaged, care should be tak- Canada, and Japan. PAL (Phase Alternation by Line) is a color
en to avoid contact with liquid crystal. Take the urgent action television system adopted mainly in European countries and
indicated should any of the following situations arise: China.
• If liquid crystal comes in contact with your skin, clean the Exif Print (Exif Version 2.32)
area with a cloth and then wash thoroughly with soap and
Exif Print is a newly revised digital camera file format in which
running water.
information stored with photographs is used for optimal col-
• If liquid crystal enters your eyes, flush the affected eye with or reproduction during printing.
clean water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical
assistance. IMPORTANT NOTICE: Read Before Using the Software
• If liquid crystal is swallowed, rinse your mouth thoroughly Direct or indirect export, in whole or in part, of licensed soft-
with water. Drink large quantities of water and induce vom- ware without the permission of the applicable governing
iting, then seek medical assistance. bodies is prohibited.
Although the display is manufactured using extremely
Technical Notes

Lenses and Other Accessories

high-precision technology, it may contain pixels that are
always lit or that do not light. This is not a malfunction, and • Use a screw 4.5 mm or shorter when attaching a tripod.
images recorded with the product are unaffected. • Fujifilm will not be held liable for performance issues or
damage caused by the use of third-party accessories.

12

367
 NOTICES
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture.
Please read the “Safety Notes” and make sure you understand them before using the camera.
Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply. See:
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
For Customers in the U. S. A.
Tested To Comply With FCC Standards Radiation Exposure Statement: This device meets the gov-
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE ernment’s requirements for exposure to radio waves. This
device is designed and manufactured not to exceed the
emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy
set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S.
Contains IC : 10293A-WMBACBM25 Government.
Contains FCC ID : COF-WMBACBM25
The exposure standard for wireless device employs a unit of
FCC Statement: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR.
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg. Tests for SAR are
(1)  This device may not cause harmful interference, and conducted using standard operating positions accepted by
(2) this device must accept any interference received, includ- the FCC with the device transmitting at its highest certified
ing interference that may cause undesired operation. power level in all tested frequency bands.
CAUTION: This equipment has been tested and found to Notes on the Grant: To comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules,
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant this product must be used with a Fujifilm-specified fer-
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to pro- rite-core A/V cable, USB cable, and DC supply cord.
vide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and A lithium ion battery that is recyclable powers
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and the product you have purchased. Please call
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to
interference to radio communications. However, there is no recycle this battery.
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular in-
California Code of Regulations, Title  20, Di-
stallation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
vision  2, Chapter  4, Article  4, Appliance Ef-
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
ficiency Regulations, Sections 1601 through
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged
1609
to try to correct the interference by one or more of the fol-
lowing measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and re-
ceiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
FCC Caution: Any changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate this equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in con-
Technical Notes

junction with any other antenna or transmitter.

12

368
 For Your Safety

For Customers in Canada Disposal of Electrical and Electronic Equipment in Private Households
CAN ICES-003 (B)/NMB-003(B) In the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
CAUTION: This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cana- Liechtenstein: This symbol on the product, or in
dian ICES-003. the manual and in the warranty, and/or on its
Industry Canada statement: This device complies with Indus- packaging indicates that this product shall not
try Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the be treated as household waste. Instead it should
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause in- be taken to an applicable collection point for the recycling of
terference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, electrical and electronic equipment.
including interference that may cause undesired operation By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will
of the device. help prevent potential negative consequences to the en-
This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or op- vironment and human health, which could otherwise be
erating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product.
except tested built-in radios. The County Code Selection This symbol on the batteries or accumulators
feature is disabled for products marketed in the US/ Canada. indicates that those batteries shall not be treated
Radiation Exposure Statement: The available scientific evi- as household waste.
dence does not show that any health problems are asso-
ciated with using low power wireless devices. There is no If your equipment contains easy removable batteries or accu-
proof, however, that these low power wireless devices are mulators please dispose these separately according to your
absolutely safe. Low power Wireless devices emit low levels local requirements.
of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range while The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural re-
being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health sources. For more detailed information about recycling this
effects (by heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does product, please contact your local city office, your household
not produce heating effects causes no known adverse health waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the
effects. Many studies of low-level RF exposures have not product.
found any biological effects. Some studies have suggested In Countries Outside the European Union, Norway, Iceland and
that some biological effects might occur, but such findings Liechtenstein: If you wish to discard this product, including
have not been confirmed by additional research. X-T5 has the batteries or accumulators, please contact your local au-
been tested and found to comply with IC radiation exposure thorities and ask for the correct way of disposal.
limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment and meets In Japan: This symbol on the batteries indicates
RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. that they are to be disposed of separately.
Operation in the band 5150–5250 MHz is only for indoor use
to reduce the potential for harmful interference to co-chan-
nel mobile satellite systems.
Caring for the Camera
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe the following precautions.
Storage and Use
If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery and memory card. Do not store or use the camera
in locations that are:
• exposed to rain, steam, or smoke
• very humid or extremely dusty
• exposed to direct sunlight or very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle on a sunny day
• extremely cold
• subject to strong vibration
Technical Notes

• exposed to strong magnetic fields, such as near a broadcasting antenna, power line, radar emitter, motor, transformer,
or magnet
• in contact with volatile chemicals such as pesticides
• next to rubber or vinyl products

12

369
 Wireless Network and Bluetooth Devices: Cautions
This product complies with the following EU Directives:
• RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
• RE Directive 2014/53/EU
Hereby, FUJIFILM Corporation declares that the radio equipment type FF220001 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/global/products/cameras/x-t5/pdf/x-t5_doc-ysk.pdf
The full text of the UK declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://dl.fujifilm-x.com/en-gb/products/cameras/x-t5/pdf/x-t5_doc-ysk_uk.pdf
This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:

This marking is valid for non-Telecom products and EU harmonized Telecom products (e.g. Bluetooth®).
• Maximum radio-frequency power (EIRP):
WLAN 2.4 GHz: 12.17 dBm
WLAN 5 GHz: 14.30 dBm
Bluetooth: 3.69 dBm
IMPORTANT: Read the following notices before using the camera’s built-in wireless transmitter.
Q This product, which contains encryption function developed in the United States, is controlled by the United States
Export Administration Regulations and may not be exported or re-exported to any country to which the United States
embargoes goods.
• Use only a wireless network or Bluetooth device.
device. Fujifilm does not accept liability for damages resulting from unauthorized
use. Do not use in applications requiring a high degree of reliability, for example in medical devices or other systems that
may directly or indirectly impact human life. When using the device in computer and other systems that demand a greater
degree of reliability than offered by wireless network or Bluetooth devices, be sure to take all necessary precautions to
ensure safety and prevent malfunction.
• Use only in the country in which the device was purchased. This device conforms to regulations governing wireless network
and Bluetooth devices in the country in which it was purchased. Observe all location regulations when using the device.
Fujifilm does not accept liability for problems arising from use in other jurisdictions.
• Do not use the device in locations subject to magnetic fields, static electricity, or radio interference. Do not use the transmitter in
the vicinity of microwave ovens or in other locations subject to magnetic fields, static electricity, or radio interference that
may prevent reception of wireless signals. Mutual interference may occur when the transmitter is used in the vicinity of
other wireless devices operating in the 2.4 GHz band.
• The wireless transmitter operates in the 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands using DSSS, OFDM and GFSK modulation.
• Security: Wireless network and Bluetooth devices transmit data via radio and consequently their use requires greater atten-
tion to security than applies in the case of wired networks.
- Do not connect to unknown networks or networks to which you do not have access rights, even if they are displayed
on your device, as such access may be considered unauthorized. Connect only to networks to which you have access
rights.
- Be aware that wireless transmissions may be vulnerable to interception by third parties.
- Do not connect this device directly to telecommunications networks (including public wireless LANs) operated by
providers or mobile, landline, Internet, or other telecommunications services.
• following may be punishable by law:
The
Technical Notes

- Disassembly or modification or this device

- Removal of device certification labels
• This device operates on the same frequency as commercial, educational, and medical devices and wireless transmitters. It also oper-
ates on the same frequency as licensed transmitters and special unlicensed low-voltage transmitters used in RFID tracking
systems for assembly lines and in other similar applications.
• To prevent interference with the above devices, observe the following precautions. Confirm that the RFID transmitter is not in
operation before using this device. Should you observe that the device causes interference in licensed transmitters used
for RFID tracking, immediately stop using the affected frequency or move the device to another location. If you notice that
12 this device causes interference in low-voltage RFID tracing systems, contact a Fujifilm representative.

370
 For Your Safety

• Do not use this device on board an aircraft. When on an aircraft, follow the instructions of airline personnel. Note that this prod-
uct may emit radio-frequency radiation even when off. This can be prevented by selecting ON for AIRPLANE MODE in
the network/USB setting menu before boarding.
• Requirements in AT/BE/BG/CZ/DK/EE/FR/DE/IS/IE/IT/EL/ES/CY/LV/LI/LT/LU/HU/MT/NL/NO/PL/PT/RO/SI/SK/TR/FI/SE/CH/
UK/HR. 5150 MHz–5350 MHz is for indoor use only.

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information

SAR is measured with the device at 0 mm to the body, while transmitting at the highest certified output power level in
all frequency bands of the device. The maximum SAR value is 0.093 W/kg (head/body) averaged over 10 gram of tissue.

U.K. Importer:
FUJIFILM UK Limited
Fujifilm House, Whitbread Way, Bedford, Bedfordshire, MK42 0ZE, United Kingdom
EU Importer:
FUJIFILM Electronic Imaging Europe GmbH
Fujistrasse 1 47533 Kleve, Germany

Technical Notes

12

371
 For Your Safety

Be sure to read these notes before using the lens

Safety Notes  WARNING
• Make sure that you use the lens correctly. Read these safety Do not immerse in or expose to water. Failure to ob-
notes and the camera Basic Manual carefully before use.
serve this precaution can cause a fire or electric
• After reading these safety notes, store them in a safe place. Do not
shock.
immerse
About the Icons
Do not disassemble (do not open the case). Failure
The icons shown below are used in this document to indicate to observe this precaution can cause fire, electric
the severity of the injury or damage that can result if the in- Do not
shock, or injury due to product malfunction.
disassemble
formation indicated by the icon is ignored and the product is
used incorrectly as a result. Should the case break open as the result of a fall or other
accident, do not touch the exposed parts. Failure to ob-
This icon indicates that death or serious serve this precaution could result in electric shock
WARNING injury can result if the information is ig- or in injury from touching the damaged parts. Re-
Do not touch
nored. internal move the battery immediately, taking care to avoid
parts injury or electric shock, and take the product to the
This icon indicates that personal injury or
CAUTION material damage can result if the informa- point of purchase for consultation.
tion is ignored. Do not place on unstable surfaces. The product may
The icons shown below are used to indicate the nature of the fall, causing injury.
instructions which are to be observed. Do not view the sun through the lens or camera view-
Triangular icons tell you that this information re- finders. Failure to observe this precaution can cause
quires attention (“Important”). permanent visual impairment.

Circular icons with a diagonal bar tell you that the

action indicated is prohibited (“Prohibited”).
 CAUTION
Do not use or store in locations that are exposed to
Filled circles with an exclamation mark indicate an
steam, or smoke or are very humid or extremely dusty.
action that must be performed (“Required”).
Failure to observe this precaution can cause fire or
electric shock.
Do not leave in direct sunlight or in locations subject
to very high temperatures, such as in a closed vehicle
on a sunny day. Failure to observe this precaution
can cause fire.
Keep out of the reach of small children. This product
could cause injury in the hands of a child.
Do not handle with wet hands. Failure to observe this
precaution can cause electric shock.
Keep the sun out of the frame when shooting backlit
subjects. Sunlight focused into the camera when
the sun is in or close to the frame can cause fire
or burns.
When the product is not in use, replace the lens caps and
Technical Notes

store out of direct sunlight. Sunlight focused by the

lens can cause fire or burns.
Do not carry the camera or lens while they are attached
to a tripod. The product can fall or strike other ob-
jects, causing injury.

12

372
 Product Care
To ensure continued enjoyment of the product, observe
the following precautions.
Camera body: Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camera body after
each use. Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals,
which could discolor or deform the leather on the camera body.
Any liquid on the camera should be removed immediately with
a soft, dry cloth. Use a blower to remove dust from the monitor,
taking care to avoid scratches, and then gently wipe with a soft,
dry cloth. Any remaining stains can be removed by wiping gen-
tly with a piece of Fujifilm lens-cleaning paper to which a small
amount of lens-cleaning fluid has been applied. To prevent dust
entering the camera, replace the body cap when no lens is in
place.
Image sensor: Multiple photographs marred by spots or blotches in
identical locations may indicate the presence of dust on the im-
age sensor. Clean the sensor using D USER SETTING > SENSOR
CLEANING.

Technical Notes

12

373
 Cleaning the Image Sensor
Dust that cannot be removed using D USER SETTING  >
SENSOR CLEANING can be removed manually as de-
scribed below.
O Note that there will be a charge to repair or replace the image sensor if
it is damaged during cleaning.

1 Use a blower (not a brush) to remove

dust from the sensor.
N Do not use a brush or blower brush.
Failure to observe this precaution
could damage the sensor.

2 Check whether the dust has been successfully removed. Re-

peat Steps 1 and 2 as necessary.

3 Replace the body cap or lens.

Technical Notes

12

374
 Firmware Updates
Updates to product firmware may result in changes not
described in the manual. For more information, visit:
https://fujifilm-x.com/support/download/firmware/cameras/

Checking the Firmware Version

O The camera will only display the firmware version if a memory card is
inserted.

1 Turn the camera off and check that a memory card is inserted.

2 Turn the camera on while pressing the DISP/BACK button. The

current firmware version will be displayed; check the firm-
ware version.

3 Turn the camera off.

N To view the firmware version or update firmware for optional acces-
sories such as interchangeable lenses, shoe-mounted flash units, and
mount adapters, mount the accessories on the camera.

Technical Notes

12

375
 Troubleshooting
Consult the table below should you encounter problems
using your camera. If you don’t find the solution here, con-
tact your local Fujifilm distributor.

Power and Battery

Problem Solution
• The battery was not charged before first use: The battery is not
charged at shipment. Charge the battery before first use
(P 42).
The camera does not • The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 42).
turn on.
• The battery is inserted incorrectly: Reinsert in the correct ori-
entation (P 36).
• The battery-chamber cover is not latched: Latch the bat-
tery-chamber cover (P 36).
The monitor may not turn on if the camera is turned off
The monitor does not
and then on again very quickly. Keep the shutter button
turn on.
pressed halfway until the monitor activates.
Technical Notes

12

376
 Troubleshooting

Problem Solution
• The battery is cold: Warm the battery by placing it in a pock-
et or other warm place and reinsert it in the camera im-
mediately before taking a picture.
• There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
The battery runs down with a soft, dry cloth.
quickly. • ON is selected for G AF/MF SETTING > PRE-AF: Turn
PRE-AF off (P 149).
• The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY
AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
it with a new battery (P 276).
The camera turns off The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a
suddenly. fully-charged spare battery (P 42).
The camera does not The camera may be busy. Check the indicator lamp
turn off. (P 9).

Technical Notes

12

377
 Problem Solution
• Make sure that the AC power adapter is correctly plugged
in (P 42).
• Ensure that the plug adapter is correctly connected to the
AC power adapter (P 42).
Charging does not start.
• The battery has not been recharged for an extended period: If
the battery has not been charged for an extended period,
charging will be disabled to ensure safety. Replace it with
a new battery.
• Insert the camera battery (P 36).
• Reinsert the camera battery in the correct orientation
(P 36).
Charging does not start • Confirm that the camera is connected to the computer
(USB). (P 45).
• If the computer is off or in sleep mode, turn on or wake
the computer and disconnect and reconnect the USB ca-
ble (P 45).
• Insert the battery.
Charging does not start • Reinsert the battery in the correct orientation.
(battery charger). • The AC adapter is not correctly connected to the charger: Check
that adapter is correctly connected to the charger.
Charging is slow. Charge the battery at room temperature.
Technical Notes

12

378
 Troubleshooting

Problem Solution
• There is dirt on the battery terminals: Clean the terminals
with a soft, dry cloth (P 36).
The indicator lamp
blinks, but the battery • The battery has been charged many times: Select BATTERY
AGE to view the battery age; if the battery is old, replace
does not charge.
it with a new battery (P 276). If the battery still fails to
charge, contact your Fujifilm dealer (P 356).
The power supply icon is Confirm that POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is se-
not displayed. lected for USB POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING
(P 270).

Menus and Displays

Problem Solution
Select ENGLISH for D USER SETTING > Qa
Display is not in English.
(P 50, 275).

Technical Notes

12

379
 Shooting
Problem Solution
• The memory card is full: Insert a new memory card or delete
pictures (P 38, 230).
• The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card
in the camera (P 272).
• There is dirt on the memory card contacts: Clean the contacts
with a soft, dry cloth.
No picture is taken when
the shutter button is • The memory card is damaged: Insert a new memory card
(P 38).
pressed.
• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 42).
• The camera has turned off automatically: Turn the camera on
(P 46).
• You are using a third-party mount adapter: Select ON for
SHOOT WITHOUT LENS (P 299).
Mottling (“noise”)
Gain is increased to aid composition when the subject is
appears in the monitor
poorly lit and aperture is stopped down, which may result
or viewfinder when
in noticeable mottling when images are previewed in the
the shutter button is
displays. Images taken with the camera are unaffected.
pressed halfway.
• The subject is not suited to autofocus: Use focus lock or man-
The camera does not ual focus (P 101).
focus. • The focus area is too small for the intended subject: Increase
the size of the focus area by a couple of steps (P 88).
Technical Notes

12

380
 Troubleshooting

Problem Solution
No panorama is
recorded when the The indicator lamp was orange when you attempted to record a
shutter button is panorama: Wait until the indicator lamps turns off (P 9).
pressed.
• The subject’s face is obscured by sunglasses, a hat, long hair, or
other objects: Remove the obstructions (P 151).
• The subject’s face occupies only a small area of the frame:
Change the composition so that the subject’s face occu-
pies a larger area of the frame (P 151).
No face is detected. • The subject’s face is turned away from the camera: Ask the sub-
ject to face the camera (P 151).
• g FACE/EYE DETECTION SETTING is off: Turn g FACE/EYE
DETECTION SETTING on (P 151).
• The camera is tilted: Keep the camera level.
• The subject’s face is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
• The subject is partially hidden: Choose a vantage point
where you can see as much of the subject as possible
(P 153).
• The subject occupies only a small portion of the frame: Get
No subject is detected. closer to your subject so it occupies more of the frame
(P 153).
• OFF is selected for SUBJECT DETECTION SETTING: Select
SUBJECT DETECTION ON (P 153).
• The subject is poorly lit: Shoot in better light.
Technical Notes

12

381
 Problem Solution
• The flash is disabled: Adjust settings (P 180).
• The electronic shutter is enabled: Choose a SHUTTER TYPE
that does not use the electronic shutter (P 170).
The flash does not fire. • The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
ly-charged spare battery (P 42).
• The camera is in bracketing or continuous mode: Select single
frame mode (P 6).
• The subject is not in range of the flash: Position the subject in
range of the flash.
The flash does not fully
light the subject. • The flash window is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly.
• Shutter speed is faster than the sync speed: Choose a slower
shutter speed (P 74, 80, 398).
Technical Notes

12

382
 Troubleshooting

Problem Solution
• The lens is dirty: Clean the lens.
• The lens is blocked: Keep objects away from the lens
Pictures are blurred. (P 54).
• s is displayed during shooting and the focus frame is dis-
played in red: Check focus before shooting (P 55).
• Shutter speed is slow and the ambient temperature is* high: This
is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. Use pixel
mapping (P 133).
* X-rays, cosmic rays, and other forms of radiation interacting
with the image sensor may cause bright spots of various col-
ors such as white, red, and blue. Pixel mapping helps reduce
Pictures are mottled. the occurrence of such bright spots.

• The camera has been used continuously at high temperatures:

Turn the camera off and wait for it to cool down (P 46,
393).
• A temperature warning is displayed: Turn the camera off and
wait for it to cool down (P 46, 393).

Technical Notes

12

383
 Playback
Problem Solution
The pictures were taken with a different make or model of
Pictures are grainy.
camera.
Playback zoom is The pictures were created using RESIZE or with a different
unavailable. make or model of camera.
• Playback volume is too low: Adjust playback volume
(P 281).
No sound in movie • The microphone was obstructed: Hold the camera correctly
playback. during recording.
• The speaker is obstructed: Hold the camera correctly during
playback.
Selected pictures are not
deleted. Some of the pictures selected for deletion are protected.
Pictures remain after Remove protection using the device with which it was
ERASE > ALL FRAMES is originally applied (P 234).
selected.
The battery-chamber cover was opened while the cam-
File numbering is
era was on. Turn the camera off before opening the bat-
unexpectedly reset.
tery-chamber cover (P 308).
Technical Notes

12

384
 Troubleshooting

Connections
Problem Solution
The camera is connected to a TV: Pictures will be displayed on
The monitor is blank.
the TV instead of in the camera monitor (P 57).
The display mode selected with the VIEW MODE button is
Both the TV and camera EVF ONLY + E: Put your eye to the viewfinder. Use
monitor are blank. the VIEW MODE button to choose another display mode
(P 16).
• The camera is not properly connected: Connect the camera
properly (P 57).
No picture or sound • Input on the television is set to “TV”: Set input to “HDMI”
on TV. (P 57).
• The volume on the TV is too low: Use the controls on the tele-
vision to adjust the volume (P 57).
The computer does not Be sure the camera and computer are correctly connected
recognize the camera. (P 255).
FUJIFILM X RAW STUDIO
Check the option selected for CONNECTION MODE
or FUJIFILM X Acquire
on the camera. Select USB RAW CONV./BACKUP
fails to correctly detect
RESTORE before connecting the USB cable (P 263).
the camera.

Technical Notes

12

385
 Problem Solution
POWER SUPPLY ON/COMM OFF is selected for USB
POWER SUPPLY/COMM SETTING. Select POWER
Cannot connect to
SUPPLY OFF/COMM ON when the camera is connected
iPhones or iPads.
via a Lightning connection to a device that do not supply
power (P 270).
Confirm that the camera is correctly connected: The procedure
Cannot connect to
for connecting the camera varies with the type of connec-
smartphone.
tor with which the smartphone is equipped (P 252).
Technical Notes

12

386
 Troubleshooting

Wireless Transfer
For additional information on troubleshooting wireless connec-
tions, visit:
https://digitalcamera-support-en.fujifilm.com/
Problem Solution
Cannot connect to
smartphone.
The camera is slow • The smartphone is too far away: Move the devices closer
(P 249).
to connect or upload
pictures to the • Nearby devices are causing radio interference: Move the cam-
era and smartphone away from microwave ovens or cord-
smartphone.
less phones (P 249).
Upload fails or is
interrupted.
• The smartphone is connected to another device: The smart-
phone and camera can connect to only one device at a
time. End the connection and try again (P 249).
• There are several smartphones in the vicinity: Try connecting
again. The presence of multiple smartphones can make
Cannot upload images. connection difficult (P 249).
• The image was created on another device: The camera may
not be able to upload images created on other devices.
• The image is a movie: Uploading movies takes some time. In
addition, smartphones may not accept upload of movies in
formats they do not support.
Select ON for Bluetooth/SMARTPHONE SETTING  >
RESIZE IMAGE FOR SMARTPHONE. Selecting OFF
Smartphone will not
increases upload times for larger images; in addition,
display pictures.
some phones may not display images over a certain size
(P 266).
Technical Notes

12

387
 Troubleshooting

Miscellaneous
Problem Solution
• Temporary camera malfunction: Remove and reinsert the
battery (P 36).
• The battery is exhausted: Charge the battery or insert a ful-
The camera is unre- ly-charged spare battery (P 42).
sponsive. • The camera is connected to a wireless LAN: End the connec-
tion.
• The controls are locked: Press and hold the MENU/OK button
to unlock the controls (P 13, 15).
The camera does not Remove and reinsert the battery (P 36). If the problem
function as expected. persists, contact your Fujifilm dealer.
No sound. Adjust the volume (P 278).
Pressing the Q button
does not display the TTL-LOCK is active: End TTL-LOCK (P 181).
quick menu.
Technical Notes

12

388
 Warning Messages and Displays
The following warnings appear in the display.
Warning Description
Low battery. Charge the battery or insert a fully-charged
i (red)
spare battery.
Battery exhausted. Charge the battery or insert a ful-
j (blinks red)
ly-charged spare battery.
The camera cannot focus. Use focus lock to focus on an-
s (displayed in red with
other subject at the same distance, then recompose the
red focus frame)
picture.
The subject is too bright or too dark and the picture will be
Aperture or shutter
over- or under-exposed. Use the flash for additional light-
speed displayed in red
ing when taking photographs of poorly-lit subject.
FOCUS ERROR Camera malfunction. Turn the camera off, remove the lens,
LENS CONTROL ERROR and check for foreign matter between the lens and the
TURN OFF THE CAMERA camera body, then replace the lens and turn the camera
AND TURN ON AGAIN on. If the problem persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer.
• The memory card is not formatted or the memory card has been
formatted in a computer or other device: Format the memory
card using D USER SETTING > FORMAT.
CARD NOT INITIALIZED • The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-
tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer.
Technical Notes

12

389
 Warning Description
Turn the camera off, remove the lens, and check for for-
eign matter between the lens and the camera body, then
LENS ERROR
replace the lens and turn the camera on. If the problem
persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer.
• The memory card is not formatted for use in the camera: For-
mat the card.
• The memory card contacts require cleaning or the memory card
is damaged: Clean the contacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the
CARD ERROR
message is repeated, format the card. If the message per-
sists, replace the card.
• Incompatible memory card: Use a compatible card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer.
PROTECTED CARD The memory card is locked. Unlock the card.
The memory card is incorrectly formatted. Use the camera
BUSY
to format the card.
The memory card is full and pictures cannot be recorded.
b MEMORY FULL Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free
space.
Technical Notes

12

390
 Warning Messages and Displays

Warning Description
• Memory card error or connection error: Reinsert the card or
turn the camera off and then on again. If the message
persists, contact a Fujifilm dealer.
• Not enough memory remaining to record additional pictures:
Delete pictures or insert a memory card with more free
WRITE ERROR space.
• The memory card is not formatted: Format the memory card.
• The memory card was removed while data were being recorded:
Do not remove the memory card during recording.
• The memory card write speed is slow: When recording mov-
ies, be sure the memory card write speed is fast enough.
The camera has run out of frame numbers (current frame
number is 999-9999). Insert a formatted memory card and
FRAME NO. FULL select RENEW for D SAVE DATA SET-UP > FRAME NO..
Take a picture to reset frame numbering to 100-0001, then
select CONTINUOUS for FRAME NO..

Technical Notes

12

391
 Warning Description
• The file is corrupt or was not created with the camera: The file
cannot be viewed.
READ ERROR
• The memory card contacts require cleaning: Clean the con-
tacts with a soft, dry cloth. If the message is repeated,
format the card. If the message persists, replace the card.
• Camera malfunction: Contact a Fujifilm dealer.
An attempt was made to delete or rotate to a protected pic-
PROTECTED FRAME
ture. Remove protection and try again.
CAN NOT CROP The picture is damaged or was not created with the camera.
Print orders can contain no more than 999 pictures. Copy
DPOF FILE ERROR any additional pictures you wish to print to another memo-
ry card and create a second print order.
CAN NOT SET DPOF The picture cannot be printed using DPOF.
F CAN NOT SET DPOF Movies cannot be printed using DPOF.
CAN NOT ROTATE The selected picture cannot be rotated.
F CAN NOT ROTATE Movies cannot be rotated.
Technical Notes

12

392
 Warning Messages and Displays

Warning Description
F CANNOT EXECUTE The selected operation is not supported: Check whether the
m CANNOT EXECUTE picture was recorded with a different model of camera.
p (yellow) The camera is approaching the maximum temperature al-
CAMERA IS APPROACHING lowed when STANDARD is selected for AUTO POWER
STANDARD OFF TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Turn the
TEMPERATURE LIMIT camera off and wait for it to cool.
The camera is approaching the maximum temperature
allowed when HIGH is selected for AUTO POWER OFF
p (yellow)
TEMP. and will shortly turn off automatically. Remaining
CAMERA IS APPROACHING
in contact with the camera could result in low-temperature
HIGH TEMPER-
burns; mount the camera on a tripod or take other steps to
ATURE LIMIT.DO NOT
avoid prolonged contact with the camera. The camera will
HOLD CAMERA FOR
shortly turn off automatically. Turn the camera off and wait
LONG PERIODS OF TIME
for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pictures taken when
this warning is displayed.
p (red) The camera temperature has reached the cutoff point and
HIGH TEMPERATURE the camera is about to turn off automatically. Turn the cam-
LIMIT REACHED era off and wait for it to cool. Mottling may increase in pic-
SHUTTING DOWN tures taken when this warning is displayed.

Technical Notes

12

393
 Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the recording time or number
of pictures available at different image sizes. All figures are
approximate; file size varies with the scene recorded, pro-
ducing wide variations in the number of files that can be
stored. The number of exposures or length remaining may
not diminish at an even rate.
SD memory cards
Capacity
64 GB
T
FINE NORMAL
O 3∶2 2660 3980
RAW (UNCOMPRESSED) 730
Photos
RAW (LOSSLESS COMPRESSED) 1380
RAW (COMPRESSED) 1950
V2160 79 minutes
Movies *
W1080 79 minutes
* Assumes default bit rate.

O • The types of memory cards suitable for movie recording vary with the
settings selected (P 68).
• Shots over an hour in length may be recorded across multiple files
without interruption. In addition, movies over 4 GB in size will be re-
corded uninterrupted across multiple files to SD memory cards with
capacities 32 GB or less.
Technical Notes

12

394
 Specifications
System
Model FUJIFILM X-T5
Product Number FF220001
Effective pixels Approx. 40.2 million
Image sensor 23.5 mm × 15.7 mm (APS-C), X-Trans CMOS 5 HR sensor with
primary color filter
Storage media Fujifilm-recommended SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
Memory card slots Two SD memory card slots (UHS-II compliant)
File system • Still pictures: Compliant with DCF 2.0
• Compressed: Exif 2.32 JPEG-baseline compliant; DPOF compli-
ant; HEIF compliant (4 : 2 : 2, 10-bit)
• Uncompressed or compressed using a reversible or non-reversible
algorithm: RAW (original RAF format; special-purpose software
required); RAW+JPEG available; TIFF (RGB)
• Movies: Compliant with HEVC/H.265, and H.264
• Audio (including voice memos):
- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)
- AAC (MP4 recordings only)
• Audio (via XLR microphone adapter):
- LPCM (two channels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling; four chan-
nels: 24-bit, 48 kHz sampling)
- AAC (MP4 recordings only; two channels: 16-bit, 48 kHz
sampling)

Technical Notes

12

395
 System
Image size O 3∶2 (7728 × 5152) O 4∶3 (6864 × 5152)
O 16∶9 (7728 × 4344) O 5∶4 (6432 × 5152)
O 1∶1 (5152 × 5152)
P 3∶2 (5472 × 3648) P 4∶3 (4864 × 3648)
P 16∶9 (5472 × 3080) P 5∶4 (4560 × 3648)
P 1∶1 (3648 × 3648)
Q 3∶2 (3888 × 2592) Q 4∶3 (3456 × 2592)
Q 16∶9 (3888 × 2184) Q 5∶4 (3264 × 2592)
Q 1∶1 (2592 × 2592)
RAW (7872 × 5196) TIFF (7728 × 5152)
O panorama: vertical (2160 × 9600)/horizontal (9600 × 1440)
P panorama: vertical (2160 × 6400)/horizontal (6400 × 1440)
Lens mount FUJIFILM X mount
Sensitivity • Still pictures: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to
ISO 125–12800 in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO 1–3; extended
output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 64, 80, 100, 25600, or 51200
• Movies: Standard output sensitivity equivalent to ISO 125–12800
in increments of ⁄ EV; AUTO; extended output sensitivity equiv-
alent to ISO 25600
Metering 256-segment through-the-lens (TTL) metering;
MULTI, SPOT, AVERAGE, CENTER WEIGHTED
Exposure control Programmed AE (with program shift); shutter-priority AE;
aperture-priority AE; manual exposure
Exposure compensation • Still pictures: −5 EV – +5 EV in increments of ⁄ EV
• Movies: −2 EV–+2 EV in increments of ⁄ EV
Technical Notes

12

396
 Specifications

System
Shutter speed • MECHANICAL SHUTTER, E-FRONT CURTAIN SHUTTER, E-FRONT +
MECHANICAL
⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ⁄ s
⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ⁄ s
⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
• ELECTRONIC SHUTTER
⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ⁄ s
⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ⁄ s
⁃ Bulb: Fixed at 1 s
• MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC, E-FRONT + MECHANICAL + ELECTRONIC
⁃ Modes P and A: 30 s to ⁄ s
⁃ Modes S and M: 15 min. to ⁄ s
⁃ Bulb: Max. 60 min.
Continuous Available frame advance rates
CONTINUOUS MODE (JPEG)
20fps(1.29X CROP) 1 20
13fps(1.29X CROP) 1 13
10fps(1.29X CROP) 1 10
15fps 2 15
10fps 3 10
7.0fps 4 7.0
5.0fps 5.0
3.0fps 3.0
1 Available with electronic shutter only.
2 13 fps with electronic shutter.
3 8.9 fps with electronic shutter.
4 6.7 fps with electronic shutter.
O The frame rate and number of frames per burst var-
ies with shooting conditions and type of memory
Technical Notes

card used.
Focus • Mode: Single or continuous AF; manual focus with focus ring
• Autofocus system: Intelligent hybrid AF (TTL contrast-detect/
phase-detection AF)
• Focus-area selection: SINGLE POINT, ZONE, WIDE/TRACKING, ALL
12

397
 System
White balance Auto (WHITE PRIORITY, AUTO, AMBIENCE PRIORITY), Custom 1,
Custom 2, Custom 3, color temperature selection, direct sun-
light, shade, daylight fluorescent, warm white fluorescent,
cool white fluorescent, incandescent, underwater
Self-timer • Still pictures: Off, 2 sec., 10 sec.
• Movies: Off, 3 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec.
Flash mode • MODE: TTL MODE (FLASH AUTO, STANDARD, SLOW SYNC.),
MANUAL, MULTI, OFF
• SYNC. MODE: 1ST CURTAIN, 2ND CURTAIN, AUTO FP (high-
speed sync)
• RED EYE REMOVAL: L FLASH, OFF
Hot shoe Provided (supports TTL flash control); supports sync speeds
as fast as ½ s
Sync contact X contact; supports sync speeds as fast as ½ s
Sync terminal Provided
Electronic viewfinder 0.5-in., 3690k-dot OLED viewfinder; magnification 0.80×
(EVF) with 50  mm lens (35  mm format equivalent) at infinity and
diopter set to −1.0 m−1; diagonal angle of view approximately
39° (horizontal angle of view approximately 32°)
• Diopter adjustment: −5 to +3 m−1
• Eyepoint: Approximately 24 mm
LCD monitor 3.0-in/7.6 cm, 1840k-dot color LCD touch screen with 3-way
tilt
Movies • Movie size: J 16:9, T 16∶9, W 17∶9, V 16∶9, d 17∶9,
(with stereo sound) W 16∶9, W 17∶9
• Frame rate: 59.94P, 50P, 29.97P, 25P, 24P, 23.98P
• Recording/output format:
- H.265 (10-bit MOV 4 : 2 : 2/4 : 2 : 0; 360, 200, 100, or 50 Mbps)
- H.264 (8-bit MOV/MP4 4 : 2 : 0; 360, 200, 100, or 50Mbps)
Technical Notes

- HDMI output supported (RAW output supported with

Atomos and Blackmagic Design external recorders; 8-bit
4 : 2 : 2/10-bit 4 : 2 : 2)

12

398
 Specifications

System
High-speed movies • Movie size: W 16∶9, W 17∶9
• Frame advance rate: 240P, 200P, 120P, 100P
Input/output terminals
Microphone connector ⌀3.5 mm mini-stereo jack
Headphone jack socket The USB connector can be converted to a headphone jack
using the supplied headphone adapter
Remote release connector ⌀2.5 mm 3-pole mini jack
Digital input/output USB connector (Type-C) USB3.2 Gen2x1
HDMI output HDMI Micro connector (type D)

Technical Notes

12

399
 Power supply/other
Power supply NP-W235 rechargeable battery (supplied with camera)
Battery life • Battery type: NP-W235
• Lens: XF35mmF1.4 R
• External flash units: Disabled
• Shooting mode: Mode P
Number of shots
PERFORMANCE LCD EVF
BOOST 11 Approx. 570 Approx. 500
NORMAL Approx. 580 Approx. 590
ECONOMY Approx. 740 Approx. 670
Total length of footage that can be recorded on
a single charge
Continuance
Actual battery life battery life of
Mode of movie capture movie capture
J 2 Approx. 90 minutes Approx. 130 minutes
V 3 Approx. 80 minutes Approx. 130 minutes
W 3 Approx. 90 minutes Approx. 150 minutes
High-speed movies 4 Approx. 100 minutes –
1 EVF FRAME RATE PRIORITY (100P) selected EVF/LCD
BOOST SETTING.
2 At a frame rate of 29.97 fps.
3 At a frame rate of 59.94 fps.
4 At a frame rate of 120 fps.
CIPA standard. Measured using battery supplied with camera
and SD memory card.
Note: Battery endurance varies with battery charge level and
the figures given above are not guaranteed. Battery endur-
ance will decline at low temperatures.
Technical Notes

12

400
 Specifications

Power supply/other
Camera size 129.5 mm × 91 mm × 63.8 mm (37.9 mm excluding projections,
(W × H × D) measured at thinnest part)/5.1 in. × 3.58 in. × 2.51 in. (1.49 in.)
Camera weight Approx. 476 g/16.8 oz., excluding battery, accessories, and
memory card
Shooting weight Approx. 557 g/19.6 oz., including battery and memory card
Operating conditions • Temperature: −10 °C to +40 °C/+14 °F to +104 °F (+5 °C to
+40 °C/+41 °F to +104 °F when battery is charging)
• Humidity: 10% to 80% (no condensation)
Wireless transmitter
Wireless LAN
Standards IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (standard wireless protocol)
Operating frequency • Israel, Indonesia
(center frequency) : 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
• USA, Canada, Brazil, China, India, Korea, Malaysia
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
: 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,745 MHz–5,825 MHz (UNII-3)
• European Union, Japan, United Kingdom, Australia, Norway, New
zealand, Turkey, Hong Kong, Philippines, Vietnam, Singapore,
Thailand, UAE, Russia, Taiwan, Saudi Arabia, Qatar, Bahrain,
Oman, Egypt, Iran, Kuwait, Lebanon, Uzbekistan
: 2,412 MHz–2,462 MHz (11 channels)
: 5,180 MHz–5,320 MHz (W52, W53)
: 5,500 MHz–5,700 MHz (W56)
Access protocols Infrastructure
Bluetooth®
Standards Bluetooth version 4.2 (Bluetooth Low Energy)
Operating frequency 2,402 MHz–2,480 MHz
Technical Notes

(center frequency)

12

401
 Specifications

NP-W235 rechargeable battery

Nominal voltage 7.2 V
Nominal capacity 2350 mAh
Rating capacity 2200 mAh
Operating 0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
temperature
Dimensions 38.92 mm × 22.8 mm × 52.26 mm/
(W × H × D) 1.5 in. × 0.9 in. × 2.1 in.
Weight Approx. 79 g/2.8 oz.
AC-5VJ AC power adapter
Manufacturer Dongguan Yingiu Power Co.,Ltd.
Address No.6 Yongxing Road, Shayao Village, Shijie Town,
523292 Dongguan City, Guangdong Province,
PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
Model name AC-5VJ
Rated input 100 V – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Input capacity Max. 50 VA
Rated output DC5.0V 3.0A 15.0W
Average active efficiency 84.8 %
Efficiency at load 10% 84.2 %
No-load power consumption 0.02 W
Operating temperature 0 °C to +40 °C/+32 °F to +104 °F
Weight Approx. 45 g ± 2 g/1.6 oz. ± 0.1 oz.

O Specifications and performance are subject to change without notice.

Fujifilm will not be held liable for any errors this manual may contain.
The appearance of the product may differ from that described in this
manual.
Technical Notes

12

402
MEMO

403
MEMO

404
MEMO

405
7-3, AKASAKA 9-CHOME, MINATO-KU, TOKYO 107-0052, JAPAN
https://fujifilm-x.com